Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
745i
745Li
760Li
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We there-
fore have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and
familiarize yourself with the information that we have com-
piled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It con-
tains important data and instructions intended to assist you
in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's
unique range of technical features. The manual also con-
tains information on maintenance designed to enhance
operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of
your BMW throughout an extended service life.
This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent
part of this vehicle. It should stay with the vehicle when
sold to provide the next owner with important operating,
safety and maintenance information.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US models or a Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Contents
Contents
Notes
6 Using this Owner's Manual
6 Symbols used
7 The individual vehicle
7 Editorial notice
8 For your own safety
9 Service and warranty
9 Reporting safety defects
Cockpit
12 Driver's side – controls and displays
16 Comfort and convenience – controls
and displays
18 Buttons in steering wheel
Control Center
19 The concept
19 Controller
19 Control Display
20 Symbols and lists
22 Menus in Control Display
23 Assistance window
*
24 Top and bottom status lines
24 Control Center in rear
*
Voice command
26 Voice command system
26 Voice commands
28 Notices
28 The notebook
29 Short commands
Opening and closing
34 Key/remote control
35 Central locking system
35 Opening and closing – from outside
37 Opening and closing – from inside
38 Doors
38 Luggage compartment lid
40 Luggage compartment
41 Alarm system
42 Electric power windows
43 Sliding/tilt sunroof
*
Adjustments
45 Sit safely
45 Seats
47 Head restraints
50 Safety belts
51 Heated seats
*
51 Active seat ventilation
*
52 Active seat
*
52 Mirrors
53 Steering wheel adjustment
54 Seat, mirror and steering wheel
memory
55 Airbags
57 Transporting children safely
59 LATCH
*
child-restraint system
59 Child-safety locks
60 Vehicle Memory, Key Memory
Driving
61 Ignition lock
62 Starting the engine
62 Switching off the engine
62 Parking brake
67 Automatic transmission with L mode
69 Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
*
© 2002 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with
the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 157 197
US English XII/2002, 6 096
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper
– bleached without chlorine, suitable for
recycling.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceOperationDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
71 Turn signal indicators/headlamp
flasher
72 Wiper system
73 Washer fluid
73 Programmable cruise control
75 Active cruise control
*
Everything under control
82 Odometer, outside temperature
display, clock
82 Tachometer
83 Service Interval Display
85 Check Control
86 Computer
91 Changing settings
Technology for comfort,
convenience and safety
93 PDC Park Distance Control
*
94 Driving stability control/
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
96 Driving stability control/ABS Antilock
Braking System
97 Dynamic Drive
97 EDC Electronic Damping Control
*
98 Flat Tire Monitor
*
99 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor
*
101 Self-leveling suspension
*
101 Adaptive brake lamp
Lamps
102 Parking lamps/low beams
103 Instrument lighting
103 High beams/standing lamps
103 Front fog lamps
103 Interior lamps
A congenial climate
105 Automatic climate control
111 Rear air conditioner
*
112 Parked-car ventilation system
Practical interior accessories
114 Integrated universal remote control
*
115 Sun blinds
*
116 Rear cooler
*
117 Glove compartment
117 Storage compartments
118 Beverage holders
118 Ashtray, front
119 Cigarette lighter, front
119 Power socket
119 Ashtray, rear
119 Cigarette lighter, rear
120 Center armrest
120 Ski bag
*
Things to remember when driving
124 Break-in procedures
124 General driving notes
125 Brake system
126 Cargo loading
127 Roof-mounted luggage rack
*
127 Entry/pass tags
Navigation
130 GPS
130 Map CD
131 Starting the navigation system
131 Display in assistance window
*
131 Selection options
132 Destination entry
132 Manual entry of destination address
134 Selecting the town or city and the
street from the directory
134 Map-guided destination selection
135 Selecting destination in "Information"
135 Selecting interesting destinations
136 Recent destinations
136 Destination list
137 Selecting route
137 Starting the destination guidance
system
138 Displaying route
139 Selecting new route
139 Voice guidance
140 Terminating/interrupting active
destination guidance
140 Address book
142 Location
142 Wordmatch principle
143 What to do if …
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Contents
Entertainment
146 Controls
146 Care instructions
147 Switching on/off
147 Using with ignition off
147 Volume adjustment
147 Tone control
Radio
149 Starting
149 Stopping
149 Selecting frequency band
150 Selecting a station
150 Storing and retrieving a station
151 Weather Band
CD Compact Disc
153 Starting
153 Stopping
154 Searching for music tracks in the
Control Display
154 Using the buttons to search for music
tracks
CD changer
156 Starting
156 Stopping
156 Status displays
157 Searching for music tracks in the
Control Display
157 Using the buttons to search for music
tracks
Cassette
158 Starting
158 Stopping
158 Selecting side A or B
158 Switching "Booktape" on/off
158 Noise suppression
159 Searching for music tracks
TV
160 Starting
160 Stopping
160 Storing programs
160 Selecting programs
161 Adjusting the picture
*
161 Selecting standard
DVD changer
164 Care instructions
164 Starting
164 Stopping
164 Status displays
164 DVD control
165 Selecting a track
166 Chapter search
166 Adjusting picture
166 Freezing frame
166 Selecting picture format
166 Selecting language, subtitles and
viewing angle
167 Opening DVD-specific menu
Using the phone in your vehicle
170 Safety notice
171 Care instructions
171 Controls
172 Telephone keypad, folding
173 Hands-free system
173 Making an SOS call
174 Telephoning with the
car phone
174 Using the BMW portable phone
174 Getting started
175 Telephone directory
176 Selecting a number from the Top 8 list
176 Redialing
176 Missed calls
BMW Assist
178 Requirements
178 Roadside Assistance of the BMW
Group
Refueling
182 Fuel filler door
183 Fuel specifications
Wheels and tires
184 Tire inflation pressure
186 Tire condition
186 Tire replacement
187 Wheel and tire combinations
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceOperationDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
188 Special characteristics of winter tires
188 Snow chains
*
Under the hood
189 Hood
190 Engine compartment
190 Engine oil
191 Coolant
192 Brake fluid
192 Brake hydraulic systems
Maintenance
193 The BMW Maintenance System
193 Care
Rules and regulations
194 California Proposition 65 Warning
194 OBD connector
Replacing components
195 Onboard tool kit
195 Windshield wiper blades
195 Lamps and bulbs
197 Changing a tire
200 Battery
201 Fuses
Giving and receiving assistance
202 Warning triangle
*
202 First-aid kit
*
202 Jump-starting
203 Towing
Technical data
208 Engine specifications
209 Dimensions
210 Weights
211 Capacities
Everything from A to Z
212 Contents
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Notes
6
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
In compiling this Owner's Manual we have
made every effort to furnish you with a con-
venient reference source affording quick
access to all the essentials. The fastest way
to find detailed information on any specific
subject is to turn to the comprehensive
index at the back of the manual. For a brief
initial overview, please refer to the first
chapter.
Should the day come when you decide to
sell your BMW, please remember to make
certain that the new owner receives this
manual; it is an important part of the
vehicle.
If you have any additional questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be
followed precisely in order to avoid
the possibility of personal injury and
serious damage to the vehicle.
<
Marks the end of a specific item of infor-
mation.
Contains information that will assist
you in gaining the optimum benefit
from your vehicle and enable you to care
more effectively for your vehicle.
Refers to measures that can be taken
to help protect the environment.
*
Indicates special equipment, country-
specific equipment and optional extras
when available.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{
...
}
Verbal instructions to use with the
voice command system.
{{
...
}}
Identifies the answers generated by
the voice command system.
Identifies systems or components
which can be activated or adapted to
suit an individual driver's requirements –
Vehicle Memory, Key Memory. Refer to
page 60.
Activation and adjustments on some of
these systems can be performed at your
BMW center.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's
Manual for information on a particular part
or assembly.
These sections contain information on
using the voice command system.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
7
The individual vehicle
On purchasing your BMW, you have
decided in favor of a model with individua-
lized equipment and features. This Owner's
Manual describes the entire array of
options and equipment available with a
specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may
contain information on accessories and
equipment that you have not specified for
your own vehicle. Sections describing
options and special equipment are marked
by asterisks
*
to assist you in identifying
possible differences between the descrip-
tions in this manual and your own vehicle's
equipment.
Should your BMW be equipped with fea-
tures or accessories not described in this
manual, please consult the enclosed sup-
plementary manual(s).
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous,
ongoing development that is conceived to
ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety
standards combined with advanced, state-
of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is
possible that the features described in this
Owner's Manual could differ from those on
your vehicle. Nor can errors and omissions
be entirely ruled out. You are therefore
asked to appreciate that no legal claims
can be entertained on the basis of the data,
illustrations or descriptions in this Owner's
Manual.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Notes
8
For your own safety
Use unleaded gasoline only. Fuels
containing up to and including
10% ethanol or other oxygenates with up
to 2.8% oxygen by weight – that is,
15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equiv-
alent amount of co-solvent – will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship. Field
experience has indicated significant differ-
ences in fuel quality – volatility, composi-
tion, additives, etc. – among gasolines
offered for sale in the United States and
Canada. The use of poor-quality fuels may
result in driveability, starting and stalling
problems especially under certain environ-
mental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude.
Should you encounter driveability prob-
lems which you suspect could be related to
the fuel you are using, we recommend that
you respond by switching to a recognized
high-quality brand.
Failure to comply with these recommenda-
tions may result in unscheduled mainte-
nance.
Follow the relevant safety rules when you
are handling gasoline.
<
Important safety information
For your own safety, use genuine
parts and accessories approved by
BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested
and approved by BMW and Original BMW
Parts, you simultaneously acquire the
assurance that they have been thoroughly
tested by BMW to ensure optimum perfor-
mance when installed on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for
damage resulting from installation of parts
and accessories not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by
other manufacturers to verify if it can be
used on a BMW safely and without risk to
either the vehicle, its operation, or its occu-
pants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories
and other products approved by BMW,
together with professional advice on using
these items, are available from all BMW
centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms,
radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels,
suspension components, brake dust
shields, telephones – including operation of
any mobile phone from within the vehicle
without using an externally mounted
antenna – or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkie, ham radio or
similar accessories, may cause extensive
damage to the vehicle, compromise its
safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical
system or affect the validity of the BMW
Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for
additional information.
<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair
of the emission control devices and
systems may be performed by any automo-
tive repair establishment or individual using
any certified automotive part.
<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
9
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publica-
tion thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following war-
ranties:
– New Vehicle Limited Warranty
– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
– Federal Emissions System Defect
Warranty
– Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
– California Emission Control System
Limited Warranty
Detailed information about these warran-
ties is listed in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US models or in the
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
Reporting safety defects
The following only applies to vehicles
owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O.
Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-
1227, Telephone (800) 831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or BMW of North
America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-
9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department
of Transportation, Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety from the
Hotline.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and
displays is intended to serve as a source
of orientation in your vehicle's operating
environment. The section will also assist
you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Cockpit
Driver's side – controls and displays
1
Rear window sun blind 115
2
Rear window safety switch 43
3 Electric power windows 42
4 Exterior mirrors 52
5 Parking brake 62
6 Parking lamps and low beams 102
7 Instrument lighting 103
8 Turn signal indicators 71
High beams/headlamp
flasher 103
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
13
9 Steering wheel 18
10 Info Display 14
11 Automatic transmission lever 67
12 Ignition lock 61
16 Horn: the entire surface
20 Fog lamps 103
21 Opening the hood 189
Computer 86,
Check Control 85
Computer 86
Standing lamps 103
13 Switching ignition on/off and
starting the engine 61, 62
14 Windshield wipers 72
Rain sensor 72
15 PDC Park Distance Control 93
17 Steering wheel heater 53
Steering wheel adjustment 53
18 Unlocking luggage
compartment 39
19 Programmable cruise
control 73
Front fog lamps
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Info Display
1 To view odometer display and reset trip
odometer to zero 82
2 Speedometer with display for
> Programmable cruise control 73
> Speed limit 89
3 Indicator and warning lamps 15
4 Tachometer 82
with navigation system guidance
display 138
5 Display panel for
> Computer 86
or
> Check Control text messages 85
or
> Voice command system 26
6 Transmission range selection 67
7 Display panel for
> Automatic transmission program
display 67
8 Indicator for
> Clock 91
> Outside temperature 82
or
> Indicator and warning lamps 85
9 Fuel gauge and computer 87, 86
10 Fog lamps 103
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
15
Indicator and warning lamps
Technology that monitors itself
The indicator and warning lamps identified
by the
+ symbol are subjected to an oper-
ation check each time you switch on the
ignition or start the engine. They each light
up once for different periods of time.
When a malfunction occurs in a monitored
system, the corresponding lamp will either
fail to go out when the engine is started, or
it will come on again during normal driving.
For information on how you should respond
when this happens, please refer to the
pages indicated.
Please fasten safety belts
+ 50
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
+ 95
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 95
ABS Antilock Braking
System
+ 96
Parking brake/Brake hydraulic
systems/DBC Dynamic Brake
Control
+ 62/ 192/ 96
Parking brake/Brake hydraulic
systems/DBC Dynamic Brake
Control for Canadian models.
Parking brake
+ 62, 65
Parking brake 62, 65
Automatic parking brake – Auto-
matic Hold
+ 63, 65
Engine
+ 194
Airbags
+ 57
Turn signal indicators 71
High beams/headlamp
flasher 103
Front fog lamps 103
Colors
The indicator and warning lamps can light
up in different colors and combinations.
The following section explains the signifi-
cance of the individual colors as well as
how you should respond when they
appear.
> Red:
Stop the vehicle immediately
or
an important reminder
> Red and yellow:
Continue to drive; drive cautiously
> Yellow:
Have the system inspected at the
earliest opportunity
or
for your information
> Green:
For your information
> Blue:
For your information.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Cockpit
16
Comfort and convenience – controls and displays
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
17
1 Glasses compartment 118
2 Storage compartment 118
3 Switching audio and video sources
on/off and adjusting volume 147
4 Telephone keypad, folding 172
5 Automatic air distribution and air supply
– left-hand side of passenger
compartment 107
6 Outside air/AUC Automatic recircu-
lated-air control/Recirculated air 107
7 To defrost windshield and windows and
remove condensation 107
8 Control Display 19
9 Temperature on left-hand side of pas-
senger compartment – turn and max-
imum cooling – press 107
10 Sliding/tilt sunroof 43
11 Channel keys for Universal Garage
Door Opener 114
12 Air supply on left-hand side of pas-
senger compartment – turn
and switch off automatic climate control
– press 107, 109
13 Reading lamps 104
14 Hazard warning flashers
15 Interior lamps 103
16 Air supply on right-hand side of
passenger compartment 106
17 Temperature on right-hand side of
passenger compartment – turn and
residual heat mode – press 107, 108
18 Rear window defroster
19 Air conditioning 107
20 Trigger emergency SOS call 173
21 Open the glove compartment
22 Automatic air distribution and air supply
– right-hand side of passenger
compartment 109
23 Station/track search and CD,
DVD 146
24 Central locking system 37
25 Controller 19
26 Seat adjustment 45
Heated seats 51
Active seat ventilation 51
BMW active seat 52
Seat, mirror and
steering wheel memory 54
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Cockpit
18
Buttons in steering wheel
Buttons are integrated in the steering
wheel for fast operation of the following
functions without being distracted from
driving:
> the automatic transmission's L mode
> selected audio source functions
> selected portable phone functions
> the voice command system
> selected TV and DVD functions.
The buttons in the steering wheel are
only operational when the corre-
sponding systems are switched on.<
Portable phone:
Receive an incoming call, initiate dialing
and end a call
Volume
Voice command system:
To switch on and off
Fast forward/reverse:
> Radio
Press briefly: next stored station
Extended pressure: automatic tuning
> CD
Press briefly: track search
Extended pressure: fast forward within
track
> Cassette
Press briefly: stop track search or fast
forward
Extended pressure: fast forward
> DVD
Chapter search
Available for individual programming:
In the "Settings" menu, you can select the
function of the button at the "MFL" menu
item, refer to page 53.
L mode:
Press briefly to switch between the auto-
matic program and the L mode, refer to
page 68.
Steptronic:
Press briefly to proceed through a selec-
tion sequence consisting of the automatic
program, the Sport program and the
manual mode, refer to page 69.
Steptronic: Upshifting and downshifting,
refer to page 69.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
19
Control Center
The concept
The Control Center has been designed to
avoid the unnecessary complexity created
by an extended number of switches and
controls. It consists of the controller and
the Control Display.
The controller is used to select the func-
tions that will appear in the Control Display.
In addition, the Control Display also shows
you messages from the Check Control.
Controller
You can slide, turn and press the controller
to enter commands. You can use it for all of
the functions in the Control Display.
To avoid posing an unnecessary
hazard, both to your own vehicle's
occupants and to other road users: never
attempt to use the controls or make adjust-
ments unless traffic and road conditions
allow.<
The following introduction illustrates how
easy it is to use the Control Center.
You can find detailed instructions
describing how to use the individual sys-
tems in the separate sections.
Control Display
An orientation menu is available for selec-
tion. Slide the controller
> toward the currently active menu
> twice in one direction.
Selecting menu
Slide the controller to select a menu, here:
"Settings".
The menu appears on the screen as soon
as you release the controller.
You can move directly to a different
menu by sliding the controller.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Control Center
20
Selecting menu entries
Turn the controller to select the
menu entry, here: "Clock".
Confirming selection or entry
Press the controller to make a
selection, here: "Clock".
Select the desired adjustment option within
the menu item and confirm, here: "Time".
Settings
The first setting option for time is activated.
> Turn the controller to select your setting
> Press the controller to confirm the new
setting – store – and to proceed to the
next highlighted position to adjust.
Changing menu page
You can select individual pages in specific
menus, here: "Climate".
Select the symbol and press the controller:
To select the second page of the menu.
To return to the first page of the menu.
Symbols and lists
The symbols in the corners and edges of
the Control Display have various functions:
1 Corner symbols:
These symbols take you to the next
menu item or in a displayed list.
To do so: turn the controller
2 List symbols:
Indicates that you can only move within
the displayed list, here: stored radio
stations.
Turn the controller to select an entry
from the list.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
21
To exit from the list, select
the symbol and confirm.
Symbols
To select the second page
To return to the first page
To exit from the list
To transfer the current display to the
assistance window. For more
detailed information on the assis-
tance window, refer to page 23
To transmit vehicle data to the
BMW Service Center
To set display units and formats,
refer to page 91
To change the language of the dis-
play texts, refer to page 91
To select settings for vehicle func-
tions
To set the brightness of the screen,
refer to page 92
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Control Center
22
Menus in Control Display
You can select from an extended range of
functions and setting options:
1 BMW Assist 178
2 Communication
> To use the portable phone 170
> Portable phone, refer to separate
Owner's Manual
3 Car data
> Computer 86
> Limit 89
> Stopwatch 90
> Service Interval Display 83
> To access Check Control
messages 85
4 Navigation 130
5 Help
> Brief help text displays 23
> Menu name for menu change
6 Entertainment
> Radio 149
> Cassette 158
> CD 153 155
> TV 160
> DVD 162
7 Settings
> Vehicle functions 53, 64, 93
> Time and date 91
> Language 91
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
23
> Units of measure and display
format 91
> Brightness 92
> Lock Control Center in rear 24
8 Climate
> Automatic climate control 105
> Heated seats 51
> Parked-car ventilation system 112
Assistance window*
While you use the Control Center, the
assistance window can provide you with a
parallel display for the active system.
You can use it for displays of the following:
> Short help and supplementary informa-
tion texts for selected menu entries
> A function selected in the "Car data"
menu, refer to page 90
> The route for vehicles with a navigation
system, refer to page 131.
Help texts in assistance window
You can call up and also cancel displays
containing help texts and supplementary
information on selected menu entries in the
assistance window.
1. Select "Help" from the orientation menu
2. Select "Brief info" menu and confirm.
The help texts appear in the assistance
window
3. Confirm again to deactivate the auto-
matic display.
Show menu name
You can program the system to display the
menu name each time you proceed to a
new menu.
1. Select "Help" from the orientation menu
2. Select "Menu name" and confirm your
entry.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Control Center
24
Top and bottom status lines
1 Hands-free mode active
2 Portable phone reception strength
3 Display for phone service provider
4 Portable phone status
> Green: incoming or outgoing call
> Red: no network available
> Yellow: routed through alternate ser-
vice network – roaming
5 Traffic Message Channel activated –
currently not available
6 Status Check Control 85
> Green: no message
> Yellow: priority 2 – the symbol
flashes briefly. You can use the "Car
data" menu to have the status report
shown in the Control Display
> Red: priority 1 – these messages
appear immediately, accompanied by a
gong and a flashing symbol
Status Service Interval Display 83
> Red: at least one service interval has
been exceeded
7 Temperature selection display, left-
hand side of passenger compartment
8 Air supply, left-hand side of passenger
compartment
9 Entertainment – display for radio, cas-
sette, CD, TV, DVD
10 Air supply, right-hand side of passenger
compartment
11 Temperature selection display, right-
hand side of passenger compartment
Assistance window
The status lines in the assistance window
show the following:
> Outside temperature
> Navigation system destination
> Time
> Date.
Control Center in rear*
Rear screen
Folding open rear screen:
1. Swing folding arm upward until it
engages
2. Fold open rear screen.
The rear screen is ready for operation.
Folding down rear screen:
1. Align rear screen straight
2. Fold rear screen downward; folding arm
unlocks
3. Swing folding arm downward.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
25
Swing the rear screen downward
when the ski bag is used, as other-
wise it could be damaged.
Do not swing the rear screen up or down
with the beverage holders open, as other-
wise it could be damaged.<
The rear screen switches off automat-
ically when it is swung downward.
Some functions are not available on the
rear screen, e.g. the BMW Assist function
can only be operated in the front Control
Display. Some functions only permit limited
operation on the rear screen, e.g. the
speed limit can only be displayed. Setting
is carried out via the front controller, refer
to page 89.<
Controller
The controller is located on the center arm-
rest.
Rear lock
The available functions are operated with
the respective controller.
In the Control Display you can limit or deac-
tivate operation of the rear screen.
1. Select the "Settings" menu and confirm
2. Select "Rear" and confirm.
3. Setting operation of rear screen:
> Select "Limited Release" and con-
firm to lock the functions used in the
front Control Display
When headphones are con-
nected, all audio and video func-
tions continue to be selectable in the
rear, with the exception of the audio or
video source activated in the front Con-
trol Display.<
> Select "None Release" and confirm
to switch off the rear screen
> Select "Full Release" and confirm to
switch off all locks.
Headphones
1 Headphone jack
2 Adjusting volume
3 Station scan/track search
> Station scan
> Tape, fast forward/reverse
> Music track search for CD and cas-
sette, chapter search for DVD changer
> Select TV channel.
Headphones are only intended for passen-
gers in the rear seats. Please check with
local regulations regarding use of head-
phones.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Voice command
26
Voice command
Voice command system
The concept
The voice command system allows you to
control operation of various vehicle sys-
tems without ever removing your hands
from the steering wheel. The system oper-
ates on the basis of voice commands that
you will learn easily after using them a few
times. In many cases, the voice command
system supports you with announcements
or questions while you are making your
entries.
The voice command system transforms
your oral commands and dialog answers
into control signals for the selected sys-
tems.
Please take the time to acquaint your-
self with how a particular system
operates before proceeding to control it
using the voice command system.<
Symbols used
{...}Verbal instructions to use with the
voice command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by
the voice command system.
Systems available for use with voice
command
> {Telephone}, refer to page 170
> {Navigation}, refer to page 130
> {Radio}, refer to page 149
> {CD}, refer to page 153
> {CD changer}, refer to page 155
> {Tape}, refer to page 158
> {Notepad}, refer to page 28
> {DVD}, refer to page 162.
Either the system that you are now oper-
ating or any current error messages will
appear in the Info Display, refer to page 27.
Voice commands
Activating voice command system
Briefly press the button in the steering
wheel.
A signal tone and "SVS active" in the Info
Display, refer to page 27, indicate that the
system is ready for use. You are automati-
cally in the main menu.
From here, you can call up all the equip-
ment that can be operated.
Canceling voice command entry
Briefly press the button in the steering
wheel
or
In dialogs in which any text can be spoken,
e.g. names, notes, canceling is only pos-
sible using the button.
The system automatically switches
over to its telephone mode if you
receive a call during voice input. "SVS off"
appears in the Info Display, refer to
page 27.<
Voice commands
The voice command system operates on
the basis of specific, predefined com-
mands; these commands should be
spoken precisely as indicated. You can
have the possible commands read back at
any stage. To do so, say the command
{Options}.
In addition to the commands described,
there are often other commands that run
the same function. Instead of {Options},
you can, for example, also say {What now}.
More detailed commands such as {Change
*
These sections contain information on
using the voice command system.
{Cancel}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
27
scale} instead of {Scale} are also often
possible.
Short commands
With the {Main menu} level, you can run
certain functions directly with short com-
mands, refer to page 29, without having to
open an equipment level.
For example, if you want to dial a phone
number, you do not have to say
rather you can say directly
Special commands
Special commands are available for spe-
cific systems. In this Owner's Manual you
will find these commands in the sections
describing the individual systems.
Displays in the Info Display
The Info Display shows you what the voice
command system has understood in line 2,
while also indicating which voice command
or question is currently active in line 1.
In addition, any error messages are also
displayed.
Selecting the navigation scale – an example
Start the dialog:
Briefly press the button in the steering
wheel.
Volume adjustment
You can adjust the volume for the instruc-
tions from the voice command system:
Turn the knob during an instruction/
announcement to select the desired
volume.
Instructions/announcements will continue
at this volume level, even if the other audio
sources are set to minimum volume.
The system automatically selects
your individual volume setting each
time you unlock the vehicle using your per-
sonal remote control unit.<
{Telephone}
1. {Dial number}
2. Enter the phone number.
Operation with the voice command
system is always indicated with this
pictograph.
You say The voice command system replies Info Display screen contents
"SVS active"
{Change scale}{{Please enter the desired scale}} "scale ?
change scale"
{Scale
500 feet}
"ok
500 ft"
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Voice command
28
Notices
Do not use the voice command
system to make emergency SOS
calls. Your voice and habitual tone could be
affected by stressful situations, as a result
of which the process of establishing the
telephone connection could be unneces-
sarily delayed. Instead, you should use the
emergency SOS button located adjacent to
the rearview mirror, refer to page 173.<
Environmental conditions
The voice command system uses a special
hands-free microphone located in the front
of your vehicle's headliner. Although the
system is designed to filter out ambient
noise, you can help ensure that your com-
mands will be understood by observing the
following instructions:
> Speak smoothly and clearly, at a normal
volume. Do not place any unusual
stress on individual syllables, and avoid
pauses
> Do not speak while the voice command
system is talking
> Keep the doors, windows and sunroof
closed to prevent interference from
ambient noise
> Avoid other sources of noise in the
vehicle while speaking, and ask other
vehicle occupants to refrain from
talking while you are using the system
> The hands-free microphone is aimed
toward the driver. This means that the
system might be unable to register the
voices of other vehicle occupants prop-
erly.
The notebook
To record a note
You can store approx. ten minutes of
spoken text – either as a single entry or as
multiple entries of any desired length.
To terminate recording:
Press the button for a long period.
When recording notes, the voice
command system does not respond
to the {Cancel} command. The text
checking function for command words is
deactivated in this case so that you can
speak any desired text for your notes. This
feature saves you from having to concen-
trate on avoiding these words while
recording.<
Listening to a notebook entry
Listening to recorded notebook entries:
Delete notes
Clearing the notebook
To delete all contents from the notebook:
{Record note}.
1. {Read out}
Approximately the first 3 seconds of
the first note are read aloud
2. Following the inquiry {{Note and
next?}} select the next function
> To listen to the entire note:
{Read out}
> To hear the next notebook entry:
{Next}
> To hear the entry again:
{Back} or
{Repeat}.
1. {Edit}
2. {Delete}.
1. {Notepad}
2. {Delete}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
29
Standard commands
The standard commands available for use
with all controlled systems are the same.
On delivery, the {Standard dialog} is
set to simplify familiarization with the
voice command system.<
Short commands
Notebook
Navigation
Function Command
To repeat the last message issued by the
voice command system
{Repeat}
To terminate the voice command system {Cancel}
To set comprehensive instructions and error
reports
{Standard dialog}
To set brief instructions and error reports {Short dialog}
To call up information on individual items of
equipment
{Help}
To provide you with a listing of the commands
available for the selected system. A corre-
sponding list simultaneously appears in the
Info Display, refer to page 27
{Options}
To open the main menu {Main menu}
Function Command
To record a note {Record note}
To listen to notebook entry {Read out note}
Function Command
To switch on the voice output {Message on}
To switch off the voice output {Message off}
To select destination from address book {Select destination}
To change scale {Scale}
To start the destination guidance system {Route guidance on}
To call up information on the current location
or destination
{Information}
To request addresses {Address book}
To call up the map view {Map}
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Voice command
30
Entertainment
Telephone
Function Command
To switch on radio {Radio on}
To switch off audio sources and TV {Audio off}
To select radio stations {Frequency selection}
To select a stored radio station {Station}
To start CD {CD on}
To select a CD {CD 1 ..6}
To start a cassette {Tape on}
To start DVD {DVD on}
To select a DVD {DVD 1 ..6}
Function Command
To switch on portable phone {Telephone on}
To dial telephone number {Dial number}
To redial {Redial}
To select from the telephone book {Dial name}
To make a new entry in the telephone book {Save name}
To have the entries of the telephone book
read out
{Read out telephone book}
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
31
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you
with information for complete control
of your vehicle. Its extensive array of
features and accessories, both for driving
and for your own safety, comfort and
convenience, are described here.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Opening and closing
Key/remote control
1 The Key Memory functions are con-
trolled by the remote control units with
their integrated keys, refer to page 60.
The color-coded decals that you
received when taking delivery of your
vehicle can be used to identify the indi-
vidual remote control units.
Each remote control unit is
equipped with an extended-life
battery which is automatically
recharged in the ignition lock each time
you drive the vehicle.
If you have any remote control units that
are not being used on a regular basis,
you should therefore remember to
recharge these units by using them to
drive the vehicle for an extended period
at least once a year, refer to page 35.<
2 Spare key for storage in a safe place,
such as in your wallet. This key is not
intended for constant use
3 Adapter for spare key
The adapter can be used to store the
spare key. It can be stored in the place
provided within the luggage compart-
ment lid-mounted onboard tool kit to
ensure that it will always be available,
refer to page 195. You can find more
detailed information on using the
adapter in the section Using the spare
key adapter.
Removing the key from the remote
control unit
Press button 1 to release the key.
With the integrated key you can unlock and
lock the following:
> the storage compartment under the
front armrest
> the driver's door
> the luggage compartment lid.
Within the storage compartment you will
also find the switch for locking the luggage
compartment separately, refer to page 39.
If you lock the storage compartment and
only turn over the remote control, no
access is possible via the luggage com-
partment lid.
Using the spare key adapter
You will need the adapter to activate the
ignition and to start the vehicle with the
spare key.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
35
Press lock button 1, slide up the cover and
insert the spare key 2 in the adapter. Close
the cover and insert the adapter in the igni-
tion lock.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system is ready for
operation whenever the driver's door is
closed. This simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Luggage compartment lid
> Fuel filler door.
The central locking system can be oper-
ated from the outside
> via the remote control
> via the driver's door lock
and from inside via the button for the
central locking system.
When the system is locked from inside, the
fuel filler door remains unlocked. Refer to
page 37.
The anti-theft system is automatically acti-
vated whenever you activate the central
locking system from outside the vehicle.
The alarm system is armed/disarmed at the
same time.
In the event of an accident, the central
locking system unlocks automatically – only
those doors which were not locked sepa-
rately with the safety lock buttons, refer to
page 38. In addition, the hazard warning
flashers and interior lamps come on.
Opening and closing – from
outside
Using the remote control
When you engage/release the vehicle's
locks, you simultaneously activate/deacti-
vate the anti-theft system, arm/disarm the
alarm system
and switch the interior lamps
on/off.
In addition, the remote control offers you
another function:
> Panic mode
In case of danger, you can trigger an
alarm.
You can have various confirmation
signals programmed into the system
to verify that the vehicle has been locked
securely.<
Remote control
1 To unlock, convenience opening mode
and alarm system
2 To lock and secure, switch off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion sensor,
switch on interior lamps and door-
mounted proximity lamps
3 To open the luggage compartment lid
4 To switch on interior lamps, activate
panic mode
Because any persons or animals left
unattended in a parked vehicle could
lock the doors from the inside, you should
always keep the remote control unit with
you; this precaution ensures that you will
remain able to unlock the vehicle from the
outside at all times.<
When it is no longer possible to lock
the vehicle via the remote control, the
battery is discharged. Use this remote con-
trol unit during an extended drive; this will
recharge the battery, refer to page 34.
In the event of a system malfunction,
please contact your BMW center, which is
also your source for replacement keys.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
Unlocking the vehicle
Press button 1 .
The interior lamps and the door-mounted
proximity lamps come on.
Press the button once to unlock the driver's
door only; press a second time to unlock all
remaining doors as well as the luggage
compartment lid and the fuel filler door.
Convenience opening mode
Hold button 1 pressed. The windows
and the sliding/tilt sunroof open. The
sliding/tilt sunroof will not be retracted if it
is already in its raised position.
Locking and securing
Press button 2 .
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
and interior motion sensor
Press button 2 once again
directly after locking. For more detailed
information, refer to page 41.
Switching on interior lamps and
door-mounted proximity lamps
If the vehicle is locked, press
button 2 .
Switching on the interior lamps
Press button 4 .
You can also use this function to locate
your vehicle in parking garages etc.
Panic mode
By pressing and holding button 4 for
more than approx. two seconds, you can
trigger the alarm system in response to any
impending danger.
To switch off the alarm: press any of the
buttons.
Opening the luggage compartment
lid
Maintain pressure on button 3 for
approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens,
regardless of whether it was previously
locked or unlocked.
During opening the luggage compart-
ment lid pivots upward and to the
rear. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.
To avoid being inadvertently locked out,
never lay the remote control unit down in
the luggage compartment. If the luggage
compartment lid was locked earlier, it will
relock automatically when closed.<
Automatic luggage compartment lid
operation*
Opening the luggage compartment
lid
Maintain pressure on button 3 for
approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens all the
way, regardless of whether it was previ-
ously locked or unlocked.
To interrupt the opening process:
Press the button again while opening is in
progress.
During opening the luggage compart-
ment lid pivots upward and to the
rear. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.
To avoid being inadvertently locked out,
never lay the remote control unit down in
the luggage compartment. If the vehicle is
locked, the luggage compartment lid is also
locked again when closed.<
External systems
External systems or devices may cause
local interference in the functions of the
remote control.
Should the remote control unit fail to
operate owing to interference of this kind,
you can respond by using the key to unlock
your vehicle at one of the doors.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
37
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply
with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communi-
cation Commission regulations. Operation
is governed by the following:
FCC ID: LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:
> This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
> this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void
the user's authority to operate this equip-
ment.<
Using the key
One turn of the key in the driver's door lock
unlocks the driver's door only.
Turning the key a second time unlocks all of
the remaining doors, the luggage compart-
ment lid and the fuel filler door.
You can have various confirmation
signals programmed into the system
to verify that the vehicle has been locked
securely.<
Convenience operation
You also have the option of operating the
windows and the sliding/tilt sunroof from
the driver's door lock.
> To open:
With the door closed, turn the key to the
Unlock position and hold it there.
> To close:
With the door closed, turn the key to the
Lock position and hold it there.
Watch during the closing process to
be sure that no one is injured.
Releasing the key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
in the event of an electrical malfunction
You can turn the key all the way to the right
or left in the door lock or engage or release
the locking mechanism in the driver's door.
Opening and closing – from
inside
You can operate the central locking system
with this button when the driver's door is
closed. The doors and luggage compart-
ment lid are unlocked or locked
only. The anti-theft system is not activated.
Also, the fuel filler door remains unlocked
to allow refueling.
If the remote control has been used to
unlock only the driver's door, refer to
page 36, and you touch the button
when the driver's door is open, the other
door, the luggage compartment lid, and the
fuel filler door are unlocked.
If the driver's door is closed, touching
the button locks it.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
You can also have the system pro-
grammed to activate the central
locking system automatically whenever the
vehicle is set in motion, or when a specific
interval elapses after it is unlocked, pro-
vided that neither the doors nor the lug-
gage compartment lid are opened in the
meantime. This can be adjusted to be key-
specific.<
Unlocking and opening the doors
> Either unlock the doors together with
the button for the central locking
system and then pull the release handle
above the armrest or
> pull the release handle for each door
twice: the first pull unlocks the door,
and the second one opens it.
When the low beams are switched on,
the interior door handles are also
lighted. The intensity of the lighting is
adjusted using the instrument lighting, refer
to page 103.<
Engaging the locks
> Use the central locking button to lock all
of the doors simultaneously,
or
> press the individual safety lock buttons
down. To prevent the driver from being
inadvertently locked out of the vehicle,
the lock button on the driver's door
automatically extends again after a brief
period if the door remains open.
Do not use the safety lock buttons to
engage the locks during driving, as
they would then fail to disengage automat-
ically in the event of an accident.
Because any persons or animals left unat-
tended in a parked vehicle could lock the
doors from the inside, you should always
keep the remote control unit with you; this
precaution ensures that you will remain
able to unlock the vehicle from the outside
at all times. <
Doors
Soft Close Automatic*
Apply gentle pressure to the door to close
it. The closing process will then be carried
out automatically.
To avoid injuries, ensure that the
door's travel path is completely free
and clear before closing.<
Luggage compartment lid
Opening from outside
Press the button. The luggage compart-
ment lid opens.
During opening the luggage compart-
ment lid pivots upward and to the
rear. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.<
The lock
All of the vehicle's keys fit the luggage
compartment lid lock located in the license
plate recess.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
39
Opening separately
Insert the key in the luggage compartment
lid's lock and turn it all the way to the right
– the lid opens.
To avoid being locked out inadvert-
ently, avoid laying the remote control
unit down in the luggage compartment. The
luggage compartment is locked again as
soon as you close the lid.
If you use the key to unlock the luggage
compartment lid while the alarm system is
armed, the alarm will be triggered. To
deactivate the alarm,
> unlock the vehicle using the remote
control, refer to page 36, or
> insert the remote control all the way into
the ignition lock, engaging the detent.<
Securing separately
The switch position will vary according to
the individual vehicle's equipment level.
1 Luggage compartment lid locked
2 Luggage compartment lid unlocked
Push the switch into position 1. This locks
the luggage compartment lid and discon-
nects it from the central locking system.
If you then lock the storage compartment in
the center armrest before handing over
only the remote control when leaving the
vehicle for valet parking, etc., this will pre-
vent unauthorized access to the vehicle
through the luggage compartment, refer to
page 34.
Manual operation
in the event of an electrical malfunction
Refer to section on Opening separately.
Opening from inside
You can use this button to open the lug-
gage compartment lid when the vehicle is
stationary. This is not possible, if the lug-
gage compartment lid has been locked
separately.
Closing
A recess has been incorporated into the
inside trim on the luggage compartment lid
to make it easier to pull down.
Automatic Soft Close feature
To close the luggage compartment lid,
merely press it down gently. The closing
process will then be carried out automati-
cally.
To avoid personal injury, always
ensure that no individuals are within
the luggage compartment lid's travel range
when closing.
Operate the vehicle only when the luggage
compartment lid is completely closed. Oth-
erwise, exhaust fumes could penetrate the
interior of the vehicle. If special circum-
stances should make it absolutely neces-
sary to operate the vehicle with the luggage
compartment lid open:
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
> Close all windows. Shut the sliding/tilt
sunroof
> Adjust the automatic climate control's
blower to supply a high rate of airflow,
refer to page 107.<
Automatic luggage compartment lid
operation*
Opening
The luggage compartment lid opens all the
way, when you
> press the button next to the steering
column
> press the button on the outside of the
luggage compartment lid, refer to
page 38
> press button 3 on the remote
control unit, refer to page 36.
During opening the luggage compart-
ment lid pivots upward and to the
rear. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.<
Closing
The luggage compartment lid closes auto-
matically when you
> press the button or
> press the button on the outside of the
luggage compartment lid, refer to
page 38.
The luggage compartment lid imme-
diately stops opening or closing if you
hold it in place by hand.<
To avoid injuries, be sure that the
travel path of the luggage compart-
ment lid is clear when it is closed, as with
all closing procedures.
Operate the vehicle only when the luggage
compartment lid is completely closed.
Otherwise, exhaust fumes could penetrate
the interior of the vehicle. If special circum-
stances should make it absolutely neces-
sary to operate the vehicle with the luggage
compartment lid open:
> Close all windows. Shut the sliding/tilt
sunroof
> Adjust the automatic climate control's
blower to supply a high rate of airflow,
refer to page 107.<
Manual operation
in the event of an electrical malfunction
Use the key to unlock the luggage com-
partment lid, refer to page 38, and then
slowly open or close it, taking care to avoid
abrupt motion in the process.
Emergency release
This lever releases the luggage compart-
ment lid from inside the luggage compart-
ment.
Luggage compartment
Net*
You can use the net to store smaller
objects on the bulkhead separating the lug-
gage compartment from the rear seats.
Do not stow objects behind the side
trim panels on the left and right in the
luggage compartment, as otherwise the
electrical parts could overheat and be
damaged.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
41
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood, or the luggage
compartment lid is opened
> To movement in the vehicle's interior –
interior motion sensor
> To changing the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
> To interruption of battery voltage.
The system responds to unauthorized
vehicle entry and attempted theft by simul-
taneously activating:
> An acoustic alarm, which lasts for a
period of approx. 30 seconds
> The hazard warning flashers for approx.
five minutes
> The high beams, which flash on and off
in the same rhythm.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
with the remote control unit or at the door
lock, the alarm system is armed or dis-
armed at the same time.
The system indicates that it has been cor-
rectly armed by switching on the hazard
warning flashers for a single cycle and by
emitting an acoustic signal.
You can have different acknowledg-
ment signals set to confirm arming
and disarming.<
You can open the luggage compartment
lid even if the alarm is armed using
button 3 of the remote control, refer
to page 36. It is armed once again when
the lid is closed.
Pressing the Panic mode button for a
longer period triggers the alarm, refer
to page 36.<
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp below the interior
rearview mirror flashes continuously:
the system is armed
> The indicator lamp flashes when the
system is armed: door(s), the hood or
luggage compartment lid are not com-
pletely closed. Even if you do not close
the alerted area, the system begins to
monitor the remaining areas, and the
indicator lamp flashes continuously
after 10 seconds. However, the interior
motion sensor is not activated
> The indicator lamp goes out when the
system is disarmed: no manipulation or
attempted intrusions have been
detected in the period since the system
was armed
> If the indicator lamp flashes for roughly
5 minutes when you disarm the system,
or until the remote control unit is
inserted in the ignition lock: an
attempted entry has been detected in
the period since the system was armed.
Following triggering of an alarm, the indi-
cator lamp will flash continuously.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
sensor may be switched off at the same
time. You can do this to prevent a false
alarm from being triggered in garages with
elevator ramps, for instance, or when the
vehicle is transported by trailer or train:
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Opening and closing
42
Lock, i.e. arm by pressing twice; press
button 2 of the remote control
twice in succession, refer to page 36, or
lock twice with the key, refer to page 37.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and
then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm
sensor and the interior motion sensor are
switched off as long as the system is
armed.
If you desire, the
> tilt alarm sensor
> interior motion sensor
can be switched off permanently. Please
contact your BMW center for assistance.<
Interior motion sensor
In order for the interior motion sensor to
function properly, the windows and sliding/
tilt sunroof must be completely closed.
Be sure to deactivate the interior motion
sensor, refer to section on Avoiding unin-
tentional alarms, when you wish to leave
the windows or sliding/tilt sunroof open.
Electric power windows
Opening and closing windows
From radio mode on:
> Press the switch until you feel resis-
tance:
The window continues to move down-
ward as long as you continue to hold
the switch
> Press the switch beyond the pressure
point:
The window moves downward auto-
matically. Press the switch again to
stop the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same
manner by pulling the switch.
The electric power windows remain avail-
able for use after the ignition is switched
off:
> For approx. 15 minutes with the remote
control unit in the radio mode
> For approx. 1 minute in position 0 or
with the remote control unit disen-
gaged.
To open, press the switch beyond the pres-
sure point.
When leaving the vehicle parked,
always remove the remote control
from the ignition lock and close the doors;
this precaution prevents children from
operating the power windows and injuring
themselves, etc.<
For information on using the convenience
operation mode at the door lock or with the
remote control unit, refer to page 36 or 37.
Safety feature
If the force rises beyond a predefined
threshold during closing, the system will
immediately stop moving the window prior
to lowering it slightly.
Despite this safety feature you should
always inspect the window's travel
path prior to closing it, as the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-
tions, such as very thin objects, and the
window would continue closing.
Pulling the switch beyond the pressure
point and holding it limits the response of
the safety feature. Under these conditions
the window will respond to forces beyond a
defined threshold by only opening several
millimeters.
If you again pull the switch past the pres-
sure point and hold it in position within a
period of roughly 4 seconds, the safety fea-
ture will be deactivated.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
43
When you close the windows they will
slow down as they approach the end
of their travel; this is to allow the safety fea-
ture to respond more precisely to any
obstructions encountered in this critical
range.<
Safety switch
With the safety switch, you can prevent the
rear windows from being opened or closed
via the switches in the rear passenger area,
by children, for example. The switch also
deactivates the rear-mounted switches
controlling the rear seats' power adjust-
ment, refer to page 47, and the rear
window sun blinds, refer to page 115. The
indicator lamp lights up when this safety
feature is activated.
Press the safety switch whenever
children are riding in the rear of the
vehicle. Careless use of the power win-
dows can lead to injury.<
The remote control unit must be
locked in position in the ignition lock
before this safety feature can be deacti-
vated.<
After installing accessories
After installing any accessory – such as a
clamp-on antenna for a portable phone –
within the window's travel range, you will
need to have the system reinitialized for
use under the new conditions. Please con-
tact your BMW center for assistance.
Sliding/tilt sunroof*
To prevent injuries, exercise care
when closing the sliding/tilt sunroof
and keep it in your field of vision until it is
shut.
When leaving the vehicle, always disen-
gage the remote control in the ignition lock
and close the doors to prevent children
from operating the sunroof and injuring
themselves, etc.<
Raising – opening – closing
From radio mode on, press the switch, or
slide it in the desired direction up to the
pressure point.
After the ignition is switched off the sunroof
remains available for operation:
> For approx. 15 minutes with the remote
control unit in the radio mode
> For approx. 1 minute in position 0 or
with the remote control unit disen-
gaged.
The headliner insert slides back somewhat
when you raise the sunroof. When the sun-
roof is opened the headliner retracts with it.
Do not use force to close the head-
liner insert with the sunroof in its
raised position, as damage to the mecha-
nism could result.<
For information on using the convenience
operation mode at the door lock or with the
remote control unit, refer to page 36 or 37.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Opening and closing
44
Automatic* opening and closing
Press the switch past the pressure point
and then release it.
In addition, the following response is also
automatic:
With the sunroof open, press the switch in
the Raise direction: the sunroof rises to its
tilt-up end position.
Press the switch again in any direction to
stop the sunroof.
The automatic opening feature in the
Raise direction can be deactivated.
Please contact your BMW center for assis-
tance.<
Safety feature
If the sliding/tilt sunroof encounters resis-
tance
> when it is closing from the raised posi-
tion
> when it is closing from a point roughly
past the middle of its travel,
the closing cycle is interrupted and the
sliding/tilt sunroof will open again slightly.
Despite this safety feature you should
always inspect the sunroof's travel
range prior to closing it, as the safety fea-
ture might fail to detect certain kinds of
obstructions, such as very thin objects, and
the sunroof would continue closing.
Pressing the switch beyond the pressure
point and holding it limits the response of
the safety feature. The sunroof only opens
a short distance.
If you again press the switch past the pres-
sure point and hold it in position within
about 1.5 seconds, the safety feature will
be deactivated.<
When you close the sliding/tilt sun-
roof it will slow down as it approaches
the end of its travel path; this is to allow the
safety feature to respond more precisely to
any obstructions encountered in this crit-
ical range.<
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
Following interruptions in electrical power,
for instance, when the battery is discon-
nected, it is possible that the sliding/tilt
sunroof will extend to its tilt-up position,
but fail to respond to other commands.
Should this occur, please have the sunroof
reinitialized at your BMW center.
Malfunctions
In the event of an electrical malfunction,
you can operate the sliding/tilt sunroof
manually:
1. Take out the interior light, reach behind
the opening, press out the cover
2. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with
the onboard tool kit, refer to page 195,
in the opening provided. Turn to slide
the sliding/tilt sunroof in the desired
direction.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
45
Adjustments
Sit safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed driving that is as
fatigue-free as possible. The sitting posi-
tion plays an important role together with
the safety belts and airbags in providing
occupants with maximum levels of passive
safety in an accident. To ensure that the
safety systems operate with optimal effi-
ciency, we strongly urge you to observe the
instructions contained in the following sec-
tion.
For additional information on transporting
children safely, refer to page 57.
Sitting safely with airbags
Always maintain an adequate dis-
tance between yourself and the air-
bags. Always hold the steering wheel by
its rim with hands at the 9 o'clock and
3 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of
injuries to your hands and arms in the event
of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing is to come between the
airbags and the seat occupant.
To prevent possible leg injuries should the
knee airbag deploy in an accident, ensure
that the front passenger assumes a correct
sitting position. Do not use the cover of the
front airbag on the front passenger side as
a storage area for objects, or as a rest for
feet or legs.<
For airbag locations and additional infor-
mation on airbags, refer to page 55.
Safe sitting position with safety belts
For the safety of all vehicle occupants,
please comply with the following instruc-
tions for wearing safety belts.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a pas-
senger's lap.
Avoid twisting the belt while routing it firmly
across the hips and shoulder. Wear it as
snugly against your body as possible. Do
not allow the belt to rest against hard or
fragile objects.
Do not route the belt across your neck, or
run it across sharp edges. Be sure that the
belt does not become caught or jammed.
Avoid wearing loose or bulky clothing that
would prevent the belt from resting
securely against your body; pull on the
shoulder strap periodically to keep it ten-
sioned.
In the event of a frontal impact, a loose lap
belt could slide over your hips, leading to
abdominal injury. In addition, the safety
belt's restraint effectiveness is reduced if
the belt is worn loosely.
Expectant mothers should always wear
their safety belts, taking care to position
the lap belt against the lower hips, where it
will not exert pressure against the abdom-
inal area.<
For putting on safety belts, refer to
page 50.
Seats
For your personal safety when adjusting
the seat position, please follow the instruc-
tions below carefully.
Never attempt to adjust your seat
while operating the vehicle. The seat
could respond with unexpected move-
ment, and the ensuing loss of vehicle con-
trol could lead to an accident.
Never recline the backrest to an extremely
horizontal position while operating the
vehicle – this precaution is especially
important for front passengers and the
occupants of electric power rear seats to
remember. Failure to observe these pre-
cautions can prevent the belts from pro-
viding effective protection against injury, as
passengers could slide under the belts in
an accident.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Adjustments
46
Please observe the information on using
safety belts provided on page 50 and the
notice on the active head restraints on
page 48.
The concept
You adjust the seat in two stages:
1 Preselect the function: the button lights
up brightly
2 Adjustments: slide control knob to
> front or rear or
> upwards or downwards
> or turn
Electric power seat adjustment
You can use the control knob to adjust var-
ious functions after first selecting them with
the buttons.
To ensure that the safety systems
continue to provide optimal protec-
tion, please observe the adjustment
instructions on page 45.<
3 Forward/backward:
Height:
Backrest:
This button is always ready for opera-
tion
4 Thigh support:
Height:
Tilt angle – driver's seat only:
5 Lumbar support
*, see below
Front comfort seat* adjustment
In addition to the electric power seat func-
tions, several other adjustment options are
also available with the comfort seat:
4 Thigh support:
Tilt angle – also passenger seat:
5 Lumbar support, see below
Backrest width:
Increase or decrease lateral
support
6 Shoulder support, see below
Head restraint height:
Backrest:
Lumbar support adjustment
5 Lumbar support
You can also adjust the contours of the
backrest to obtain additional support in the
lumbar region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive
supplementary support to help you main-
tain a relaxed, upright sitting position.
Increase or decrease curvature
Increase curvature at top or bottom.
Shoulder support adjustment
6 To adjust the tilt angle of the shoulder
support:
You can use the adjustable upper backrest
for supplementary support in the shoulder
region. This provides a relaxed driving
position and helps relieve stress on the
shoulder muscles.
Make corrections in the forward/
backward adjustment of the seat to
ensure that the safety belt still fits firmly
against your body. If you do not do this, the
protection provided by the safety belt may
be reduced.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
47
Rear comfort seat* adjustment
You can use the control knob to adjust var-
ious functions after first selecting them with
the buttons.
1 Forward/backward:
Tilt angle:
Backrest:
This button is always ready for opera-
tion
2 Lumbar support, refer to page 46
3 Shoulder support:
Head restraint height:
Backrest:
It is not possible to adjust the comfort
seats if the safety switch for the
power windows has been depressed, refer
to page 43.<
Adjusting passenger seat from the
rear
The front passenger's seat can be adjusted
from the rear seating positions, for
instance, when a rear passenger desires
more legroom.
Press the button to activate this function,
see arrow.
You can use the control knob to adjust the
settings after selecting the desired function
with the buttons.
1 Forward/backward:
Height:
Backrest:
2 Head restraint height:
Press the button again, see arrow, to deac-
tivate this function.
Resetting to standard adjustment
position
You can use the button to return the rear
seats to their standard or default positions.
Maintain pressure on the button until the
system completes the adjustment.
It will be necessary to return the rear
seats to their standard position before
using a child-restraint system, for instance,
refer to page 57.<
Head restraints
Adjustment information
Head restraints can reduce the risk of
spinal injury in the event of an acci-
dent.
Adjust the head restraints so that they are
centered roughly at the level of your ears.<
Electric power seat, comfort seat
You have the option of adjusting the head
restraint to the desired height, either using
the electric power assist, or manually,
depending upon the seat.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Adjustments
48
To set the height manually
Pull or press the head restraint.
To set the height electrically*
Set the height of the head restraint.
To adjust the tilt angle
To adjust head restraint tilt angle: adjust by
tilting the head restraint.
To set the side extensions
You can fold the side extensions on the
head restraint forward for increased lateral
support.
Front head restraints, active*
When necessary, the system will respond
to a rear impact by automatically triggering
the active head restraints.
To ensure that the active head
restraints afford maximum protection,
and to avoid unnecessary risks to personal
safety, we request that you read and
comply with the following.
> Adjust the head restraints so that they
are centered at roughly ear height
> Do not install seat or head-restraint
covers
> Never use the head restraints as sup-
ports for suspending objects of any
kind, such as clothes hangers. Refrain
from mounting accessories on either
the seat or the head restraint.<
Rear seats
To adjust mechanically
> To raise: pull
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
49
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push down the head restraint.
To remove head restraints, refer to next
column.
To adjust center head restraint
If the head restraint has been low-
ered, pull it back up, continuing until
the detent engages, before allowing a pas-
senger to ride in the rear center position.
Failure to observe this precaution can
reduce the level of occupant protection.<
To adjust electrically*
If necessary, adjust the head restraint's
height to ensure that it is centered at
roughly the height of the passenger's ears.
With the safety switch pressed, refer
to page 43, the height adjustment of
the head restraints is deactivated.<
The head restraints at the outer seating
positions extend automatically whenever
the system detects a passenger on the
seat. You can also adjust the height of the
head restraint electrically.
To prevent possible personal injury
and property damage, always ensure
that the area above the head restraints is
clear and unobstructed before extending
them upward.<
Manual head restraint removal and
installation
Removal
1. Pull the head restraint upward to the
stop
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and remove
the head restraint.
Installation
1. Press the button, arrow 1, and slide the
head restraint into its support
2. Adjust the head restraint for your
personal comfort.
Rear comfort seat*
To adjust height
If necessary, adjust the head restraint's
height to ensure that it is centered at
roughly the height of the passenger's ears.
With the safety switch pressed, refer
to page 43, the height adjustment of
the head restraints is deactivated.<
The head restraints at the outer seating
positions extend automatically whenever
the system detects a passenger on the
seat. You can also adjust the height of the
head restraint electrically.
To prevent possible personal injury
and property damage, always ensure
that the area above the head restraints is
clear and unobstructed before extending
them upward.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Adjustments
50
To set the side extensions
You can fold the side extensions on the
head restraint forward to increase lateral
support.
Safety belts
Despite the presence of airbags, you
should always remember to fasten
your safety belt before starting off; airbags
are intended to enhance the protection
provided by the safety belts, and not to
replace them.<
Fastening
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage
in the belt buckle.
Warning lamp Please fasten safety
belts
Accompanied by a signal or a mes-
sage in the Check Control display.
Remains on until the safety belts are fas-
tened.
Releasing
Press the red button in the buckle. Hold the
belt and guide it back into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be in the correct position for seat occu-
pants of every build if the seat is correctly
adjusted, refer to page 45.
The two rear safety belt buckles integrated
in the rear seat are for passengers sitting
on the left and right. The belt buckle
embossed with the word CENTER is
intended exclusively for use by passengers
riding in the center position.
Also observe the instructions on adjusting
the seats on page 45.
If the safety belts are damaged or
stretched in an accident: have the
entire belt system, including the tensioning
mechanisms, replaced at your BMW
center. Have the belt anchorage points
inspected for damage at the same time.
Failure to observe this precaution may pre-
vent the safety belts from effectively pro-
viding optimal protection when needed. If a
child-restraint system was in the vehicle
during an accident, consult the manufac-
turer's instructions regarding replace-
ment.<
Rear seats
When the rear center position is not
occupied, the latch on the safety belt
can be inserted in the slot between the
seat's upholstery and the backrest.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
51
Heated seats*
Front
The system regulates the temperatures of
the seat cushion and backrest.
The temperature setting progresses one
step through its control sequence each
time you press the button.
To switch off:
Maintain pressure on the button for several
seconds.
Rear
The operating concept is the same as for
the front heated seats.
Temperature distribution at the front
It is possible to select a temperature-distri-
bution pattern providing different levels of
heating for the seat cushion and the back-
rest, for instance, to adapt for different
clothing on the legs and upper body.
1. Select "Climate"
2. Select and confirm
3. Select "Seat temp." and confirm
4. Select "Left" or "Right" and confirm
5. Turn to adjust temperature distribution
6. Press to confirm your entry.
The system automatically selects
your individual temperature distribu-
tion settings each time you unlock the
vehicle using your personal remote control
unit.<
Active seat ventilation*
Front
The system progresses one step through
the control sequence each time you press
the button.
To switch off:
Maintain pressure on the button for several
seconds.
Use level 3 to cool the passenger
compartment rapidly, for instance,
when heat accumulates in the vehicle. The
system automatically reverts to operation
at level 2 after a brief period.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Adjustments
52
Rear
The operating concept is the same as for
the front seat ventilation.
Active seat*
Active adjustment of the seat cushion's
contours reduces muscular tension and
fatigue to help prevent lower back pain.
To activate: press the button, the indicator
lamp comes on.
Mirrors
Adjusting exterior mirrors
1 4-way adjustment
2 To select mirror for adjustment
To prevent the exterior mirrors on this
vehicle from being damaged, always
fold them in by hand before entering an
automatic car wash.<
You can also adjust the mirrors manually by
pressing against the outer edges of their
lenses.
Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat,
mirror and steering wheel memory on
page 54.
The mirror on the passenger's side
features a lens with a more convex
surface than the mirror installed on the
driver's side. When estimating the distance
between yourself and other traffic, bear in
mind that the objects reflected in the mirror
are closer than they appear. This means
that estimations of the distance to following
traffic should not be regarded as precise.<
Self-defrosting mirrors
The mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature*
These mirrors automatically respond to
ambient light and headlamp glare from fol-
lowing vehicles by automatically dimming
through an infinitely-variable range. There
are two photocells located in the interior
rearview mirror for this purpose. One is
integrated within the mirror's lens, arrow,
while the other is located at an offset posi-
tion on the rear of the mirror housing.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
53
The mirrors automatically revert to their
clear, undimmed mode whenever you
place the selector lever into reverse.
For trouble-free operation, keep the
photocells clean and do not cover the
area between the interior rearview mirror
and the windshield. Do not attach any kind
of stickers on the windshield in front of the
mirror, either.<
Illuminated vanity mirror in the rear
1. Press button 1. The vanity mirror folds
down
2. Pull the mirror down slightly before pro-
ceeding to turn it or tilt it into the
desired position
3. Press the vanity mirror back up before
folding it back in.
Steering wheel adjustment
The steering wheel can be adjusted in any
of four directions by pressing the appro-
priate end of the button.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving. There is a risk
of accident from unexpected movement.<
Storing steering wheel positions, refer to
Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory on
page 54.
Automatic steering wheel
adjustment
The steering wheel automatically moves as
high up and far forward as possible to ease
driver entry and exit before then returning
to the standard position or stored memory
setting.
This automatic feature is governed by the
driver's door and the ignition switch.
Steering wheel heater*
The steering wheel's heater operates when
the ignition is on.
Press the button to activate or deactivate
this system.
The indicator lamp within the button lights
up when the steering wheel heater is in
operation.
Programming button function
You can assign specific individual
functions to the programmable
button. This feature then provides
you with quick access to this function,
allowing you to control it without undue
distraction from road and traffic conditions.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Adjustments
54
1. Select "Settings"
2. Confirm
3. Select "MFL". Continue to press the
controller until the desired function
appears:
> "Recirc. air"
In this mode the supply of outside air
remains blocked, refer to AUC Auto-
matic recirculated-air control on
page 107
> "Navi info"
To repeat the most recent message
from the navigation system, refer to
page 139
> "AUTO P"
To activate/deactivate Automatic Hold,
refer to Automatic Hold on page 63.
You can select the displayed function using
the button in the steering wheel.
If you have activated the Automatic
Hold feature, refer to page 63, you
can use the button to deactivate the
system for parking maneuvers, etc.<
Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory
You can store and select two different
adjustment settings for the driver's seat,
exterior mirrors and steering wheel.
If your vehicle is equipped with comfort
seats, you can also store and set two
seating positions for each additional seat
with a memory.
The adjustment of the lumbar support is not
stored in the memory.
Storing
1. Radio mode, or switch on ignition
2. Set desired seating position; for driver's
seat also the outside mirror and
steering wheel position
3. Press
MEMORY button:
The indicator lamp within the button
comes on
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
The indicator lamp goes out.
Selecting a stored setting
Convenience mode
1. Driver's door open after unlocking or
ignition lock in radio position
2. Briefly press the desired memory
button, 1 or 2.
The system immediately cancels the
adjustment procedure when you press one
of the seat adjustment buttons or use one
of the memory buttons.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
55
Safety feature
1. Driver's door closed and ignition
switched either on or off
2. Press memory button 1 or 2 and main-
tain pressure until the adjustment pro-
cess has been completed.
If you press the
MEMORY button acciden-
tally:
Press the button again; the indicator lamp
goes out.
Do not call up a position from the
memory while the vehicle is moving.
There is a risk of accident from unexpected
movement of the seat or steering wheel.<
You can have your vehicle pro-
grammed to automatically dial in your
own individual adjustment settings for the
seat, mirrors and steering wheel whenever
you use your personal remote control unit
to unlock the vehicle.<
When using the Key Memory feature
always make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is empty and unob-
structed. If you fail to do so, any persons or
objects behind the seat could be injured or
damaged by a rearward movement of the
seat.<
Passenger-side exterior mirror tilt
function
Automatic curb monitor
1. Select the driver's door mirror with the
switch
2. When you select the transmission posi-
tion R, the door mirror on the front pas-
senger side tilts downward slightly. This
allows the driver to see the area imme-
diately adjacent to the vehicle – such as
a curb – when parking, etc.
You can deactivate this automatic feature:
Slide the mirror selection switch to the pas-
senger's side position.
Airbags
1 Front airbags for driver and front pas-
senger
2 Head airbags in front and rear
3 Side airbags in front and rear
*
4 Knee airbags for driver and front pas-
senger
Airbags are located under the upholstery
covers on the steering wheel, in the instru-
ment panel, in the door trim panels in front
and rear
*, on the roof pillars and the sides
of the headliner.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Adjustments
56
Protective effect
The front airbags help protect the front
passengers by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot
provide adequate restraint. When needed,
the head and side airbags help provide
protection in the event of side impact. The
side airbags help restrain the side of the
occupant's upper torso, and the head air-
bags help support the head while also
helping provide protection against any
objects penetrating into the passenger
compartment. The knee airbags help pro-
tect the legs against impact against the
cockpit.
The side airbags in the rear pas-
senger area of your vehicle may
already have been deactivated either at the
time of manufacture or by a BMW center.
You may have them activated if you desire
to do so. Please contact your BMW center
for additional information.<
For information on the correct sitting posi-
tion, refer to page 45.
The airbags do not deploy in
response to minor accidents or rear
collisions, nor do they respond to certain
kinds of vehicle rollover.<
Even when all safety guidelines are
observed, there is a small residual risk that
passengers will sustain facial, hand or arm
injuries in isolated instances. The ignition
and inflation noise may provoke a mild –
usually temporary – hearing loss in
extremely sensitive individuals.
Important safety notes
Do not apply adhesive materials to
the cover panels of the airbags, cover
them or modify them in any other way.
Do not attempt to remove the airbag
restraint system from the vehicle. If you
note any indication of system malfunction,
if you desire to have an airbag deactivated,
or if the airbags are triggered in response
to an accident, you should always entrust
all inspection, repair and dismantling oper-
ations to your BMW center.
Never modify or tamper with either the
wiring or the individual components in the
airbag system. This category includes the
upholstery in the center of the steering
wheel, on the instrument panel, the side
trim panels on the front or rear doors, and
the roof pillars along with the sides of the
headliner. Do not attempt to remove or dis-
mantle the steering wheel.
To ensure compliance with official safety
regulations, entrust disposal of airbag gen-
erators only to a BMW center.
Unprofessional attempts to service the
system could lead to failure in an emer-
gency or undesired airbag activation, either
of which could result in personal injury.
Do not touch the individual components
directly after the system has been trig-
gered, because there is a danger of
burns.<
At all times, occupants should sit
upright and be properly restrained –
infants and small children in appropriate
child-restraint systems; larger children and
adults using the safety belts. Never let an
occupant's head rest near or on a side
airbag because the inflating airbag could
cause a serious or fatal injury. Please note
that the word Airbag imprinted on the door
trim panel indicates the airbag's location.
Never install a rearward-facing child-
restraint system on the front passenger
seat. If you do so, the child could be
severely injured when the airbag is trig-
gered.
Children under 13 years of age and chil-
dren less than 5 ft (150 cm) tall should
always ride in the rear and the restraint sys-
tems should be secured with the vehicle's
safety belts.
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat. However, a child sitting in the
rear seat and not properly restrained may
place his or her head on or near the airbag,
if so equipped.
For example, a child — even though belted
— may fall asleep with his or her head
against the side airbag. It may be difficult
for a driver to ensure that children in the
rear seat will remain properly positioned at
all times and do not place their heads on or
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
57
near the side airbag. Therefore, we recom-
mend that the rear side airbags, if provided,
be deactivated if you plan to transport chil-
dren in the rear seat.
The rear seat side airbags may already
have been deactivated, either at the time of
manufacture or by a BMW center. Labels in
the rear door opening should indicate the
status of your rear seat side airbags. If you
are uncertain of their status, or wish to have
the airbags activated or deactivated,
please contact your BMW center.<
Even when all these guidelines are
observed, there is still a small residual risk
of injuries to the face, hands and arms
occurring from airbag deployment in iso-
lated instances. The ignition and inflation
noise may provoke a mild temporary
hearing loss in extremely sensitive individ-
uals.
Airbag warning information is also provided
on the sun visors.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp shows the
airbag and belt-tensioner system's
operational status as soon as you
insert the remote control unit in the ignition.
System operational:
> The indicator lamp comes on briefly.
System malfunction:
> The indicator lamp fails to come on or
> it remains on continuously.
A system malfunction could prevent the
system from responding to an impact
occurring within its normal response range.
Please respond to any signs of malfunction
by having the airbag system inspected
immediately at a BMW center.
Transporting children safely
Commercially-available child-restraint sys-
tems are designed to be secured with a lap
belt or with the lap belt portion of a combi-
nation lap/shoulder belt. Improperly or
inadequately installed restraint systems
can increase the risk of injury to children.
Always read and follow the instructions that
come with the system.
Child-restraint system with tether
strap
If you use a child-restraint system with a
tether strap, three additional tether
anchorage points have been provided –
refer to the arrows in the illustration.
Depending on the location selected for
seating in the rear passenger area, attach
the tether strap to the corresponding
anchorage point to secure the child-
restraint system, as shown in the illustra-
tion below.
Each seating position is fitted with a head
restraint.
Outer seating positions:
Lift the head restraint and pass the tether
strap between the head restraint and the
seat back. It is recommended to readjust
the head restraint into the lowest possible
position.
Center seating position:
The head restraint must be adjusted into
the lowest possible position. Pass the
tether strap over the head restraint.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Adjustments
58
Adjust the tether strap according to the
child-restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Before installing any child-restraint
system or child seat, please read the
following:
Never install a rearward-facing child-
restraint system in the front passenger seat
of this vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an airbag
supplemental restraint system for the front
passenger. Because the backrest on any
rearward-facing child-restraint system – of
the kind designed for infants under 1 year
and 20 Ibs. (9 kg) – would be within the
airbag's deployment range, you should
never mount such a system in the front
passenger seat, since the impact of the
airbag against the child restraint's backrest
could lead to serious or fatal injuries.
If it is necessary for a child – not an infant –
to ride in the front seat, certain precautions
should be taken. First, move the passenger
seat as far away from the instrument panel
as possible. This important precaution is
intended to maximize the distance
between the airbag and the child. Older
children should be tightly secured with a
safety belt, after they have outgrown a
booster seat that is appropriate for their
age, height and weight. Younger children
should be secured in an appropriate for-
ward-facing child-restraint system that has
first been properly secured with a safety
belt. Never install a rearward-facing child-
restraint system in the front passenger
seat.
We strongly urge you to carefully read and
comply with the instructions for installation
and use provided by the child-restraint's
manufacturer whenever you use such a
system.
Be sure that all occupants – of all ages –
remain properly and securely restrained at
all times. If your vehicle is equipped with
electric power seats at the rear, these will
need to be returned to their standard
adjustment setting position before a child-
restraint system is used, refer to page 47.
Always press the safety switch for the
power windows before transporting chil-
dren in the rear seats, refer to page 43. This
switch also disables the power rear seat
adjustment. Incorrect or unsupervised
adjustment of the electric power seats
could lead to injuries or damage to the
child-restraint system(s) installed in the
rear.<
All rear seating positions in your vehicle
meet the recommendations of SAE J1819,
an industry-recommended practice for
securing child-restraint systems in motor
vehicles.
Child seat security
All of the rear belt retractors and the front
passenger's safety belt can be locked for
mounting and securing child-restraint sys-
tems.
Information regarding this is located near
the buckle latch of each safety belt.
Lock the safety belt
Pull the entire length of the belt from the
belt retractor. Allow the reel to retract the
belt somewhat and engage the buckle,
then tighten the belt against the child-
restraint system. The retraction mechanism
is now locked.
Unlock the safety belt
Release the buckle, remove the child-
restraint system and allow the belt retractor
to reel the belt completely in.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
59
LATCH* child-restraint
system
LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for
CHildren.
If the vehicle is equipped with electric
power seats, these must be returned
to their standard adjustment setting before
a LATCH child-restraint system can be
used, refer to page 47.<
Access to anchorage points
The rear outer seating positions are pro-
vided with anchors for a LATCH child-
restraint system. The illustrations show the
left rear seat as an example.
The outer anchorage points for the LATCH
child-restraint system are identified by
flags.
Canadian models only:
The anchorage points for the LATCH child-
restraint system are identified by buttons.
You can obtain an installation guide
for mounting LATCH child-restraint
systems at your BMW center. The guide,
although not necessary for installation of a
LATCH child-restraint system, will facilitate
the installation and also help protect the
vehicle's seating surfaces. Always observe
all instructions for installation and use pro-
vided by the child-restraint's manufac-
turer.<
Engage the buckle on the center belt and
then pull the belt away from the child-
restraint's anchorage point.
Firmly press the installation guide into the
gap between the upholstery on seat and
backrest, continuing until the two funnel-
shaped guides snap into place in the
LATCH support braces in the seat.
Pull the installation guides to remove.
Child-safety locks
Slide down the safety levers on the rear
doors:
The door can now be opened from the out-
side only.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Adjustments
60
Vehicle Memory, Key
Memory
How the system functions
Doubtless you have often reflected on how
great it would be if you could configure
your vehicle's various adjustment settings
to meet your own personal requirements. In
developing your vehicle, BMW has incor-
porated a number of options for personal
adjustment which you can set in the Con-
trol Center. You can have these pro-
grammed at your BMW center.
The available configuration settings fall into
two categories, according to whether their
primary orientation is the vehicle – Vehicle
Memory – or the individual – Key Memory.
You can have up to four different basic set-
tings adjusted for four different persons.
The only requirement is that each person
uses his or her own remote control.
When your vehicle is unlocked with the
remote control, the vehicle recognizes the
individual user by means of a data
exchange with the key, and makes adjust-
ments accordingly.
Color-coded decals are provided to help
you distinguish the individual remote con-
trol units with their different settings.
What the system can do
Please contact your BMW center for more
information on the range of options avail-
able with Vehicle Memory and Key
Memory.
You will see this symbol throughout
the Owner's Manual. It is to remind
you at appropriate places of the settings
that are available to you. These positions
can be looked up in the index under the
respective keyword.<
Following configuration of the
memory functions, vehicle operation
may differ from the description in the
Owner's Manual. Should you want to sell
your BMW some day, please remember to
have the memory functions reset to the
default state.<
Examples of Vehicle Memory
functions
> Central locking system: set different
signals as an acknowledgment
> Follow-me-home lamps: activate/deac-
tivate function
> Daytime driving lamps: activate/deacti-
vate function
> Alarm system: set different acknowl-
edgment signals to confirm arming/dis-
arming
> Alarm system: activate/deactivate inte-
rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
> Automatic headlamp control: adjust
sensitivity
Examples of Key Memory functions
> Seat memory: activate/deactivate func-
tion
> Central locking system: vehicle is
locked as soon as you drive off or if you
have not opened a door or the luggage
compartment lid after unlocking. Acti-
vate/deactivate function
> Automatic climate control: key-specific
storage of the temperature, blower and
air conditioner setting. Activate/deacti-
vate function
> Check Control: set languages and units
> Seat heating: recall personal tempera-
ture distribution.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
61
Driving
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control unit all the way
into the ignition lock. This also activates the
radio mode.
When the remote control unit is in the
ignition lock you can start the engine
without first switching on the ignition.<
Switching the ignition on and off
Continue to press the start/stop button to
switch the radio mode on and off or switch
the ignition on and off.
Do not depress the brake pedal until
you are ready to start the engine. If
you push the start/stop button while the
brake pedal is depressed the engine will
start immediately.<
Radio mode
Several systems, such as the Control
Center, parked-car ventilation, etc., are
available for use. The time and outside
temperature appear in the Info Display.
The radio mode is automatically
deactivated:
> After approx. 16 minutes, when a door
is closed and the system does not reg-
ister the presence of any individuals in
the vehicle
> Immediately if the remote control is
removed from the ignition lock.<
Ignition switched on
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Ignition off
The indicator lamps in the Info Display go
out. Only the automatic transmission's
range display remains visible for a brief
period.
Removing the remote control unit
from the ignition lock
Press the remote control unit in briefly; it is
ejected and now protrudes slightly from the
lock. This procedure will also switch off the
ignition if it is on.
Switch off the engine before removing
the remote control unit from the igni-
tion lock.
The transmission automatically shifts to
position P – Interlock.<
If the remote control is still in the ignition
lock when the driver's door is opened, a
gong will sound and a message will appear
in the Info Display.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Driving
62
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in closed
rooms, as otherwise the inhaling of
toxic exhaust gases can cause uncon-
sciousness and death. The exhaust gases
contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and
colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.<
1. Insert the remote control unit all the way
into the ignition lock
2. Depress the brake pedal
3. Briefly press the start/stop button.
Your BMW is equipped with the con-
venience starting feature. After
depressing the brake pedal, all you need to
do is briefly press the start/stop button.
The system responds by automatically
engaging the starter and allowing it to run
until the engine starts, after which it then
disengages automatically.
The automatic starting mode will not
operate or will be canceled if the battery
voltage is low. The engine can be started
by jump-starting, refer to page 202.<
Do not allow the engine to warm up by
leaving it running while the vehicle remains
stationary. Instead, begin to drive immedi-
ately at a moderate engine speed.
If you have accidentally switched off
the engine while driving, it can be
restarted from a speed of approx. 3 mph/
5 km/h by pressing the button. It is not
necessary to depress the brake pedal.<
Under the following conditions you should
press the accelerator pedal halfway down
when starting:
> If the engine fails to start on the first
attempt, for instance, if it is very hot or
cold
> During a cold start at high altitudes,
from approx. 3,281 ft/1,000 m, at very
low temperatures, from approx. +5 7/
–15 6.
Refrain from starting the vehicle
repeatedly at brief intervals, and
avoid an excessive number of starting
attempts if the vehicle fails to start;
repeated activation of the starter over an
extended period would allow unburned or
only partially combusted fuel to enter the
catalytic converter, where it can cause
overheating and damage to the unit.<
Switching off the engine
With the vehicle stationary, briefly press the
start/stop button. This also activates the
radio mode.
Should exceptional circumstances
render it necessary for you to switch
off the engine while the vehicle is moving,
press the start/stop button for approxi-
mately 1 second.
If you maintain pressure on the start/stop
button for longer than two seconds while
switching off the ignition, the remote con-
trol unit will be ejected.<
Always remove the remote control
unit from the ignition lock before
leaving the vehicle.<
Parking brake
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with an electrome-
chanical parking brake.
The parking brake is primarily intended to
prevent the vehicle from rolling while
parked.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
63
You have two separate options for
engaging the parking brake:
> Manually, by briefly pressing the button
> Automatically, through activation of the
Automatic Hold mode, refer to page 64.
An electrohydraulic mechanism then
engages the parking brake to prevent the
rear wheels from turning whenever you
switch off the engine.
When the engine is running, parking brake
engagement is controlled by the brake
system's hydraulic circuits, which act on
the disc brakes at the front and rear
wheels.
Brake pedal feel
Because this function is activated using the
brake system's hydraulic circuits, the
response of the brake pedal may change
slightly. Engagement may also be accom-
panied by activation noise – this is normal.
Manual engagement
Press the button briefly, the
word PARK appears briefly in
the Info Display. With the
parking brake set, the indicator
lamp lights up red in the
Info Display, refer to page 14.
With the ignition off, the indicator
lamp goes out after a brief
period.<
Manual release
With the ignition on, briefly
press the button: the indicator
lamp in the Info Display goes
out.
Provided that the remote control unit
is engaged in the ignition lock, you
can also release the parking brake after the
engine has been switched off. This function
is intended for use in automatic car
washes, etc.<
When leaving the vehicle, always
release the remote control unit from
the detent in the ignition lock; this precau-
tion prevents children from disengaging the
parking brake, etc.
The parking brake can still be engaged at
any time when the remote control unit is
released from the detent. It is only possible
to disengage the parking brake with the
ignition on.<
If exceptional circumstances should
make it necessary to engage the
parking brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain pressure on the button.
The indicator lamp appears in red in the
Info Display. A gong sounds at the same
time.
The brake lamps come on.
The vehicle continues to brake automati-
cally for as long as you maintain pressure
on the button.<
When you brake the vehicle to a vir-
tual stop, i.e., down to a speed of
approximately 2 mph/3 km/h or below, the
parking brake remains engaged.
The indicator lamp in the Info Display
lights up red. Press the button briefly to
disengage the parking brake manually.<
Automatic Hold
You can activate this feature after starting
the engine; it then remains operational until
the next time the engine is switched off.
This feature provides supplementary sup-
port during vehicle operation by automati-
cally engaging and releasing the parking
brake during stops at traffic lights, in stop-
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Driving
64
and-go traffic, etc. As the vehicle then no
longer tends to creep when the transmis-
sion is engaged, it is no longer necessary
to hold the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal.
It prevents the vehicle from rolling back-
ward during uphill starts.
The parking brake also engages automati-
cally when you switch off the engine after
stopping the vehicle.
You can activate and deactivate the Auto-
matic Hold feature by selecting the "Set-
tings" menu in the Control Center.
A description of the Control Center is pro-
vided on page 19.
Automatic Hold activation/
deactivation
1. Select "Settings"
2. Select and confirm your selec-
tion
3. Select "AUTO P". Press the controller
to activate/deactivate the desired func-
tion
> Automatic Hold is activated.
The green AUTO P status message in
the Info Display shows you that the
system is ready for operation
> Automatic Hold is deactivated.
The green AUTO P status message dis-
appears from the Info Display.
You can program the programmable
function button on the steering wheel
to control the Automatic Hold function,
refer to page 53.
This will allow you to activate and deacti-
vate the Automatic Hold function quickly
and without distraction from traffic and
road conditions.<
You can also deactivate Auto-
matic Hold by pressing the
button while the vehicle is sta-
tionary. The vehicle remains
stationary, the indicator lamp
changes from green to red. Press the
button again to release the parking brake.
Driving with Automatic Hold
The parking brake engages automatically
when the vehicle comes to a stop. The indi-
cator lamp in the Info Display lights
up green.
To start off again, simply press the acceler-
ator pedal. The parking brake is released
automatically; the indicator lamp
goes out.
Do not drive through an automatic car
wash with Automatic Hold on and the
engine running. The system would engage
the parking brake while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.<
Parking with Automatic Hold
The parking brake engages automatically
when you stop the vehicle and switch off
the engine. The indicator lamp
changes from green to red.
Provided that the remote control unit
is engaged in the ignition lock, you
can also release the parking brake manu-
ally after switching off the engine, refer to
page 63. This option is useful in automatic
car washes, etc.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.<
When leaving the vehicle, always
release the remote control unit from
the detent in the ignition lock; this precau-
tion prevents children from disengaging the
parking brake, etc.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
65
For your safety
Automatic Hold is automatically deacti-
vated when
> the engine is switched off
> the system detects that the driver's seat
is not occupied while the engine is run-
ning
> the hood is opened while the engine is
running
> the luggage compartment is opened
with the transmission in reverse while
the engine is running, and
> when the parking brake is used to bring
the vehicle to a stop.
The indicator lamp changes from
green to red, and the AUTO P letters in the
Info Display disappear.
Before starting off again, briefly press the
button to disengage the parking brake
manually, refer to page 63, or reactivate
Automatic Hold, refer to page 64.
Before leaving the vehicle with the
engine running, always move the
automatic transmission's selector lever to
position P and ensure that the parking
brake is engaged. The vehicle could start to
roll if you fail to observe these precautions.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.<
Automatic Hold is automatically
deactivated whenever the system
detects any tendency for the wheels to spin
in response to slippery road surfaces. Note
the status reports in the Check Control.
You can find more detailed information on
Check Control on page 85.<
Malfunctions
If a malfunction occurs, the indicator
lamp lights up yellow in the Info Dis-
play and a status report will appear in the
Check Control. Please note any supple-
mentary information that appears in the
Control Display.
Releasing the parking brake
manually
You can respond to any interruptions in the
supply of electrical power, for instance, if
the battery is discharged or disconnected,
by releasing the parking brake manually.
Before proceeding to release the
parking brake manually, and each
time you park the vehicle without engaging
the parking brake, always ensure that the
automatic transmission's selector lever is
in position P, refer to page 67. Note the
range indicated in the Info Display.
If it is not possible to avoid parking on an
extremely steep slope, use some supple-
mentary means, such as a wheel chock, to
make certain that the vehicle will not roll,
refer to page 198. Otherwise the danger
exists that the vehicle could roll when
parked on a very steep hill.<
Should it also be necessary to release the
automatic transmission's lockout manually,
for instance, if the battery is discharged,
always adhere to the following sequence:
1. If necessary, start by manually releasing
the parking brake
2. Then release the automatic transmis-
sion's lockout manually, refer to
page 70.
Jump-starting and towing, refer to
pages 202 and 203.
What you will need
1 Screwdriver handle
2 Emergency-release tool
3 10 mm open-end wrench
You will find the required tools in the
onboard tool kit mounted on the inside of
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Driving
66
the luggage compartment lid, refer to
page 195.
Insert the emergency-release tool in the
screwdriver handle as shown in the illustra-
tion.
Releasing
1. Remove the floor mat and the cover on
the spare tire
2. Guide the emergency-release tool with
the screwdriver handle into the
opening, arrow 1
3. Apply the open-end wrench to the
hexagon on the emergency-release
tool.
Press against the resistance from the
spring to guide the emergency-release
tool all the way in, then hold it in place.
Turn the emergency-release tool in the
direction indicated by arrow 2, con-
tinuing until you hear the mechanism
snap into place and feel resistance;
maintain pressure on the tool after the
mechanism engages
4. Use the open-end wrench to turn the
emergency-release tool against the
drive unit's mechanical resistance, con-
tinuing to rotate it in arrow direction 2
until you feel a substantial increase in
turning effort.
To prevent possible damage to the
rear brakes, always make sure that
the parking brake is completely released
before driving the vehicle.<
5. Return the tools to their places
6. Return the spare tire cover and the floor
mat to their original locations.
Have any defects repaired at the
nearest BMW center. The technicians
can also return the parking brake to normal
operational status after it has been
released manually in response to malfunc-
tion.<
Following manual release, the actual
status of the parking brake may vary
from that displayed by the indicator lamp.<
Operation after interruptions in
power supply
The parking brake may only be used
again, if it was released manually after
an interruption in power supply, i.e. as a
result of a discharged or disconnected bat-
tery. If this is not done, the parking brake
may fail to operate correctly. Even with the
parking brake engaged, there would be a
danger of the vehicle rolling on steep
hills.<
Once the electrical power supply has been
restored you can again use the parking
brake:
With the ignition on and the
vehicle stationary, press the
button briefly three times at
intervals of approx. 5 seconds.
This initializes the system as
follows:
> Initializing the released setting
> Engage – the system registers the new
status and the brake setting is initial-
ized. The indicator lamp in the
Info Display lights up red.
> Release – the parking brake is ready for
operation. The indicator lamp in
the Info Display goes out.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
67
Automatic transmission
with L mode
While you can drive as with a conventional
automatic transmission, you also have the
option of retaining your current gear selec-
tion with the L/D button on the steering
wheel, refer to page 68.
Transmission ranges
P R N D
Program display
L1 – L6
Buttons on steering wheel
L/D –
Selecting transmission range
The selector lever is at the center
position. To select transmission
ranges D, R or N, always start by pulling
toward the steering wheel, arrow 1, then
press up or down. Note the range indicated
in the Info Display.<
> Range D or R:
Press the selector lever up or down,
continuing to apply pressure to move it
past the detent
> Neutral N:
Press the selector lever as far as, but
not beyond, the detent
> Park P:
Press button P, arrow 2.
The selector lever immediately returns to
the center position when released.
Depress the brake pedal before
shifting out of P or N; the shift com-
mand will not be executed unless the brake
is applied – Shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a range, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
You can activate the Automatic Hold fea-
ture to suppress the vehicle's tendency to
creep, refer to page 63.<
Shift commands are transmitted electroni-
cally. To help avoid malfunctions, each
command undergoes a plausibility check
prior to execution.
Remember to observe the Check Control
for status messages.
You can find additional information on the
Check Control on page 85.
To prevent the vehicle from rolling,
always select position P and engage
the parking brake before leaving the
vehicle with the engine running. Note the
information provided in the Info Display.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Driving
68
P — Park
Press the button.
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
The transmission lockout prevents the rear
wheels from turning. The lockout disen-
gages when you press the selector lever
toward D, N or R while the engine is run-
ning.
P is automatically engaged when you
remove the remote control unit from
the ignition lock after parking the vehicle.<
R — Reverse
Press the selector lever upward, con-
tinuing to apply pressure to move it past
the detent. Select R only when the vehicle
is stationary.
N – Neutral
Press the selector lever as far as the
detent, but no further. Select N only if your
journey is interrupted for a long period.
> From D press the selector lever up
> From R press the selector lever down.
Note the arrows indicating direction in the
range display.
N is selected automatically whenever
the remote control unit remains
locked in the ignition lock after the ignition
is switched off. This function is useful in
automatic car washes, etc.
After approx. 30 minutes the system auto-
matically engages P. Remember to
observe the Check Control for status mes-
sages.<
D Drive – Automatic
Press the selector lever down, con-
tinuing beyond the detent. This is the range
recommended for normal vehicle opera-
tion. All forward gears are available.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel
consumption is lowest when driving in
position D.
Kickdown
The kickdown mode provides maximum
acceleration.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond full-
throttle detent point.
L mode
We recommend the L mode for times when
you wish to suppress certain shifts, for
instance, when ascending or descending
steep grades.
When the L mode is activated the transmis-
sion remains in your current gear, which
also appears in the Info Display, refer to
page 67. The transmission continues to
shift through the available ratios, but does
not proceed beyond the gear in the display.
Activating the L mode
Press the L/D button on the steering wheel.
The transmission downshifts when you
press the buttons on the rim of the steering
wheel briefly. The newly selected limit
appears in the Info Display.
The transmission only executes downshifts
that will result in a plausible combination of
vehicle and engine speeds. The transmis-
sion will no longer execute upshifts beyond
the selected range.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
69
Deactivate the L mode to obtain max-
imum acceleration for overtaking
maneuvers, etc.<
Deactivating the L mode
> Press the L/D button or
> press the selector lever into position D
once again.
Automatic transmission
with Steptronic*
While you can drive as with any conven-
tional automatic transmission, you also
enjoy the option of shifting manually at the
steering wheel, refer to the next column.
Transmission ranges
P R N D
Program display
S or M1 – M6
Buttons on steering wheel
S/M/D + –
Selecting a transmission range
The procedure for selecting transmission
ranges is the same as that employed in the
L mode, refer to page 67.
Sport program and manual operation
When you press the S/M/D button on the
steering wheel once, the system responds
by activating the transmission's Sport pro-
gram, as indicated by the letter S in the Info
Display, refer to previous column. We rec-
ommend this program for performance-ori-
ented driving.
When you press the S/M/D button a
second time the transmission switches to
its manual mode; press again to return to
the automatic program.
You can also return to the standard auto-
matic program by reselecting D.
In the manual mode the transmission
upshifts when you briefly tap the buttons
on the rear of the steering wheel. You
downshift by briefly pressing the buttons
on the front of the steering wheel. The Info
Display shows the manual ranges M1
through M6.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combi-
nation of engine and vehicle speed; thus,
for example, a downshift that would cause
the engine to overrev will not be executed
by the system. The selected gear appears
briefly in the Info Display, followed by the
current gear.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Driving
70
To obtain maximum acceleration, for
passing maneuvers, etc., during
operation in the manual mode, use the
kickdown or downshift manually.<
Malfunctions
A status report will appear in the Check
Control to alert you to any malfunctions in
the transmission-control system. Please
note any supplementary information that
appears in the Control Display. The direc-
tional arrows also start to flash in the Info
Display.
While it will remain still possible to move
the selector lever to any desired position,
the transmission will revert to operation in
its default mode with only a limited number
of forward gears.
Some types of malfunction will make it
impossible to engage all gears.
The engine may respond with reduced
output when accelerating from a standing
start.
If this happens, avoid extreme engine loads
and consult the nearest BMW center.
If no status messages appear in the
Info Display you should accelerate
carefully to confirm that you are driving in
the desired direction.
Never work in the engine compartment
with any of the forward or reverse gears
engaged, as the vehicle could start to
move. Engage the parking brake, refer to
page 62.<
Releasing transmission lockout
manually
You can respond to any interruptions in the
supply of electrical power, for instance, if
the battery is discharged or disconnected,
by releasing the transmission lockout man-
ually.
To prevent the drive wheels from
locking up and sliding, the transmis-
sion lockout must always be released man-
ually before the vehicle is towed.<
Press the brake pedal before
releasing the transmission lockout
manually. If the brakes are not applied, the
vehicle could start to roll if parked on a
steep slope.
The transmission lockout should only be
released for towing. Remember to engage
the transmission lockout when you repark
the vehicle after moving it.
Should it also be necessary to release the
parking brake manually, owing to a dis-
charged battery, etc., always adhere to the
following sequence:
1. Start by manually releasing the parking
brake, refer to page 65
2. Then proceed to manually release the
transmission lockout.<
Jump-starting and towing, refer to
pages 202 and 203.
Releasing
1. Use the vehicle key to release the cover
panel beneath the instrument panel by
turning the lock counterclockwise, then
fold down the cover
2. Use the strap 1 to pull out the release
lever, continuing until it snaps into
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
71
place – the transmission lockout is
released.
Re-engage the transmission lockout
after parking the vehicle at its destina-
tion. Otherwise there is a danger that the
vehicle could start to roll if parked on a
steep slope.<
Engaging again
1. Disengage the release lever by pressing
it together with the red detent lever,
arrow 1
2. Guide the release lever all the way back
into its original position – the transmis-
sion lockout is again engaged
3. Fold up and lock the cover panel. Now –
and not before – the key may be
removed.
Once the transmission lockout has
been re-engaged, the warning in the
Check Control should disappear, and the
symbol in the Info Display should change
from N to P. Should this fail to happen,
there is a danger that the vehicle could
start to roll.<
Information on jump-starting, tow-starting
and towing begins on page 202.
Turn signal indicators/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams – blue indicator lamp
2 Headlamp flasher – blue indicator lamp
3 Turn signal indicators – the green indi-
cator lamp flashes, accompanied by a
periodic ticking from the turn signal
indicator relay
Using turn signal indicators
Move the lever beyond the detent position.
It then returns to the center position when
released. Press the lever as far as the
detent to switch off the turn signal indica-
tors.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever up to but not beyond the
detent. It then returns to the center position
when released.
If the flashing of the indicator lamp and the
ticking from the relay are both faster than
normal, this indicates that one of the bulbs
is defective; if a trailer is attached, this
could also indicate that one of its turn
signal indicator bulbs is defective.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Driving
72
Wiper system
1 Standard wiper speed: briefly press
once.
Fast wipe: briefly press twice
2 To switch off wipers or for brief wipe
3 To activate/deactivate rain sensor
4 To clean windshield and headlamps
5 To adjust rain sensor sensitivity level
The lever automatically returns to its
initial position when released.<
1 Standard wiper speed
The system automatically reverts to opera-
tion in the intermittent mode whenever the
vehicle stops.
Fast wiper speed
You can also select this position by
pressing the lever upward past the detent.
The system automatically reverts to opera-
tion in the standard wiper speed whenever
the vehicle stops.
4 Cleaning windshield
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a
brief period.
Cleaning headlamps
Each fifth time you press into position 4 to
clean the windshield while the headlamps
are on.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do so, your vision could
be obscured. To avoid freezing, use a
washer fluid antifreeze, refer to page 73.
Avoid activating the washer when the
reservoir is empty, as damage to the pump
could result.<
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles and the
windshield itself in the area around the
wipers are heated automatically when the
ignition is switched on.
Rain sensor
The rain sensor is located on the wind-
shield, directly in front of the interior rear-
view mirror.
Activating the rain sensor
Press briefly with ignition in radio mode.
The indicator lamp comes on. The wipers
will always respond by completing at least
one sweep of the windshield.
Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level
Turn the rotary knob 5.
Deactivating the rain sensor
Press the button again. The indicator lamp
goes out.
The rain sensor is automatically deac-
tivated when you switch off the igni-
tion.<
Deactivate the rain sensor when
passing through an automatic car
wash. Failure to do so could result in
damage caused by undesired wiper activa-
tion.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
73
Selecting wiper fold-out position
Important for changing wiper blades, when
folding away from windshield to prevent
blades from sticking when ice forms, etc.
1. Switch off the engine and remove the
remote control unit from the ignition
lock
2. Press the wiper lever up and maintain
pressure for about 3 seconds until the
wipers are roughly vertical – this is the
fold-out position.
After folding the wipers back against the
windshield you will need to reactivate the
wiper system:
1. Insert the remote control unit to activate
the radio mode in the ignition lock
2. Apply brief upward pressure to the
wiper lever. The wipers return to their
retracted position and are ready for
normal operation.
To prevent damage to the wipers,
always fold them back against the
windshield before switching on either the
radio mode or the ignition.<
Washer fluid
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Capacity: 6.3 US quarts (6 liters).
Fill with water and – if required – with a
washer antifreeze, according to manufac-
turer's recommendations.
We recommend that you mix the
washer fluid before adding it to the
reservoir.<
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Always keep it well away from sparks
and open flames, and store it in tightly
closed containers well out of the reach of
children. Always observe the instructions
for use provided on the container.<
Programmable cruise
control
The concept
The programmable cruise control is avail-
able for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph
(30 km/h) and higher. The vehicle maintains
and stores the speed that you set using the
lever mounted on the steering column.
You can also use the multilevel preset
mode to store 6 desired speeds for later
selection with the lever on the steering
column, refer to page 75.
This feature assists you in quickly adapting
the vehicle speed to specific road condi-
tions, e.g. changes in speeds limits.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving on winding roads, in case of
heavy traffic or poor road conditions –
snow, rain, ice, loose road surface – that do
not permit a constant speed.<
One lever for all functions
Activating system
Press 1 or pull 2 lever as far as the detent.
The system maintains and stores the cur-
rent vehicle speed.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Driving
74
1 Maintaining and storing speed,
accelerating
Press the lever as far as the detent:
The system maintains and stores the cur-
rent vehicle speed. Every time you tap the
lever the vehicle's speed increases by
roughly 1 mph (1 km/h).
Press the lever longer:
The vehicle accelerates without pressure
on the accelerator pedal. The system main-
tains and stores your current speed as
soon as you release the lever.
The vehicle may accelerate beyond
the preset speed on steep downhill
stretches where the engine's braking effect
alone may not be sufficient to slow the
vehicle. Speed can drop on uphill grades if
the engine output is insufficient.<
2 Maintaining and storing speed,
decelerating
Pull lever back to detent:
The system maintains and stores the cur-
rent vehicle speed. Every time you tap the
lever the vehicle's speed decreases by
roughly 1 mph (1 km/h).
Pull the lever longer:
The throttle aperture is automatically
reduced, slowing the vehicle. The system
maintains and stores your current speed as
soon as you release the lever.
3 Interrupting cruise control
Briefly press the lever up or down while the
cruise control is active.
In addition, cruise control is interrupted
automatically
> when you apply pressure to the brake
pedal
> when you select the automatic trans-
mission's neutral range N
> when the DSC system, Dynamic Sta-
bility Control, is in active operation.
4 Recalling stored speed
Briefly press button 4:
The vehicle accelerates to and maintains
the last speed stored.
Deactivating system
When the ignition is switched off, the
system is deactivated and the stored speed
is deleted.
Displays in the Info Display
5 Display of speed ready for recall
> – cruise control activated
> – cruise control deactivated
6 Display of stored desired speed – multi-
level preset function
5 and 6 are displayed when the
system is activated.<
Activating multilevel preset function
Push 1 or pull 2 the lever beyond the
detent.
The current driving speed is maintained,
stored and displayed as the available
speed 5.
If no desired speeds are stored, you
can increase or reduce the speed by
5 mph (10 km/h) with the multilevel preset
function activated each time you press or
pull the lever beyond the resistance point.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
75
Changing preset level
Push 1 or pull 2 the lever beyond the
detent. The preset speed progresses to the
next desired speed. The lowest speed that
is possible to select is roughly 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Interrupting the cruise control
With the cruise control active, briefly tap
the lever up or down.
Hiding display for multilevel preset
function
When activated, press the lever upward or
downward for approx. 3 seconds.
Showing display for multilevel preset
function again
Press 1 or pull 2 the lever beyond the
detent.
Deactivating the multilevel preset
function
The multilevel preset function is also deac-
tivated when you switch off the ignition.
Storing desired speeds
With vehicle stationary
Switch on the ignition.
Press 1 or pull 2 the lever beyond the
detent: the selectable speed level is dis-
played with 5.
> To increase desired speed:
Press the lever forward
> To decrease desired speed:
Pull back the lever
> To store desired speed:
Maintain pressure on button 4 for
approx. 3 seconds. The stored desired
speed appears in 6.
If 6 speeds have already been stored,
it will be necessary to delete one
before entering a new preset speed.<
While driving
Activate multilevel preset function.
Maintain pressure on button 4 for approx.
3 seconds. The respective driven speed is
applied as the desired speed and displayed
with 6.
If all of the graduations flash at once
this indicates that 6 desired speeds
have already been stored. You must then
delete at least one.<
Deleting desired speeds
Select the desired speed 5.
Press button 4 for approx. 3 seconds.
Active cruise control*
The concept
With active cruise control you can select a
desired speed which is not only automati-
cally maintained when driving on open
roadways, but also varied to maintain a
selected distance setting as slower traffic
is encountered.
Active cruise control is a technological
advance over the familiar cruise control
and is a welcome relief from the constant
adjustment of speed that can accompany
driving in traffic on freeways or other high-
speed thoroughfares. Especially on longer
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Driving
76
trips, the system can reduce fatigue and
tension, while increasing your enjoyment of
driving. Please use it safely and respon-
sibly.
In addition to holding a steady cruising
speed, if you do encounter slower vehicles
ahead, active cruise control will – within the
scope of given possibilities – adjust your
vehicle's speed automatically so that one
can flow with the traffic without frequent
intervention by the driver. If, for example,
while cruising at the selected speed, you
begin to approach a slower vehicle ahead
of you in the same lane, the system will
reduce your vehicle's speed to the same as
that of the vehicle ahead to maintain your
selected distance setting between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead. There are
four settings for distance, which is addi-
tionally speed-dependent. Based on your
selected distance setting, the system auto-
matically decreases the throttle setting and
lightly applies the brakes if necessary. The
vehicle brake lamps will automatically illu-
minate to signal a following driver to take
action. In addition, it may be necessary for
the vehicle to downshift to maintain the dis-
tance setting selected. If the vehicle ahead
speeds up or when the lane ahead
becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate
to the speed you have selected by
increasing the throttle setting and shifting
gears as needed.
Active cruise control is not and must
not be used as a collision avoidance/
warning system.<
Since this active cruise control
system is a new technology and oper-
ates differently from conventional cruise
control systems which you may be accus-
tomed, you are strongly urged to read all of
the pages relating to this system before
use. Pay special attention to the informa-
tion contained in the Things to know about
active cruise control section in this manual
beginning on page 79.<
Info Display screen contents
1 Stored desired speed display
2 Detected vehicle display. Lights up
when vehicle driving ahead is detected
3 Selected distance to vehicle driving
ahead
4 Digital speed display.
Appears briefly when you select your
desired speed, refer to page 77.
1, 2 and 3 are displayed when the
system is activated.<
The system is activated.
The display appears as soon as
you activate the system and no
vehicle is detected driving
ahead.
Vehicle detected.
The display lights up when a
vehicle is detected driving
ahead.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
77
The system requests you to
intervene by braking or with an
evasive maneuver. The display
flashes. The active cruise con-
trol cannot automatically
restore the distance to the vehicle driving
ahead. You will find more detailed informa-
tion on page 80.
Automatic intervention by ABS
or DSC, or you actuate the
parking brake while driving. The
active cruise control now only
intervenes by braking.
Operating the active cruise control
1 Activate system,
store and increase desired speed
2 Activate system,
store and decrease desired speed
3 Deactivate system
4 With system deactivated:
Briefly press the button to recall the
stored speed and distance
4 With system activated:
Increase desired speed by 1 mph
(1 km/h) with each press of the button
5 Select distance to vehicle driving
ahead. You can choose from four avail-
able distance settings. You will find
more detailed information on page 78
Adjust your desired speed to the
traffic conditions and remain ready to
brake at all times. Great differences in
speed to the vehicles driving ahead, e.g.
when quickly approaching a truck or when
another vehicle swerves into your lane,
cannot be compensated for by the
system.<
Activate system
From approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) you can
activate the system by pressing the lever
forward or pulling it back:
The current driving speed is stored as a
desired speed and briefly displayed in the
speedometer, see arrow.
If the system cannot be activated, the
display ACC --- mph (km/h) briefly
appears in the speedometer. The system
may have been automatically deactivated,
refer to Deactivate system, or a malfunction
has occurred.
To call up Check Control messages, refer
to page 86.<
1 Desired speed store and increase
Press the lever forward:
The system adopts and stores your current
speed as a desired speed. The speedom-
eter indicates this speed.
Subsequently pressing forward increases
the desired speed to the next 5-mile place
(10 km/h).
Each time the lever is pressed forward
again, the desired speed is increased by
another 5 mph (10 km/h) until a maximum
of 110 mph (180 km/h) is reached. The
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Driving
78
speed then displayed is stored and
reached on a clear road.
2 Desired speed store and decrease
Pull back the lever:
The current driving speed is rounded off to
the next 5-mile place (10 km/h), displayed
and stored.
Each time the lever is pulled back again,
the desired speed is decreased by another
5 mph (10 km/h) until the minimum speed
of 20 mph (30 km/h) is reached. The speed
then displayed is stored and reached on a
clear road.
3 Deactivate system
Press the lever up or down while the
system is active. The displays in the speed-
ometer disappear. You can use the system
again as required.
In addition, the system is deactivated auto-
matically:
> when you apply pressure to the brake
pedal
> when you select the automatic trans-
mission’s neutral range N
> when you deactivate the Dynamic Sta-
bility Control DSC
> when you actuate the parking brake
during driving
> when the system reduces the speed to
below 20 mph (30 km/h) due to a traffic
situation.
The system deactivates automatically
when the speed is set to below
20 mph (30 km/h). A gong sounds and a
message appears in the Check Control.
The active intervention of the driver is
required.<
Background lighting
You can switch off the background lighting
of the speedometer and tachometer
> when you have deactivated the system
> when the prewarning field in the
tachometer has gone out, refer to
page 82
> when the destination guidance system
of the navigation system is deactivated.
Press the lever up or down for approx.
1 second.
4 Resume to stored desired speed
and distance setting
Press button 4:
The displays appear in the speedometer.
The system is reactivated and uses the last
stored desired speed and distance setting.
4 Fine adjustment of desired speed
In the activated state, the desired speed
increases by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time
button 4 is pressed briefly.
5 Select distance
You can choose from four distance steps.
> Rotary switch upward:
Increase distance
> Rotary switch downward:
Decrease distance.
The selected distance is displayed in the
speedometer.
Distance 1
Distance 2
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
79
Distance 3
Distance 4
This distance is always set
when the system is used for the
first time after starting the
engine.
Use good judgment to select the
appropriate following distance given
road conditions, traffic, applicable laws
and driving recommendations for safe fol-
lowing distance.<
Things to know about active cruise control
As with conventional cruise control
systems, active cruise control in no
way diminishes or substitutes for the
driver’s own personal responsibility, alert-
ness and awareness in adjusting speed,
braking or otherwise controlling the
vehicle. The driver should decide when to
use the system on the basis of road, traffic,
visibility, and weather conditions. Active
cruise control is intended for use on
highway-type roadways where traffic is
moving relatively smoothly. Do not use this
system in city driving; heavy traffic such as
during rush hour; on curvy, winding roads,
slippery roads or roads with sharp curves
such as highway off-ramps; during
inclement weather such as snow, strong
rain or fog; or when entering interchanges,
service/parking areas or toll booths. It is
also important to regulate your vehicle's
speed and distance setting within appli-
cable legal limits. Always be ready to take
action or apply the brakes if necessary,
especially when the system is actively fol-
lowing a vehicle in front of you.<
Always remember that the range and
ability of the system does have phys-
ical limitations. It will not apply the brakes
or decelerate your vehicle when there is a
slow-moving vehicle, stopped vehicle or
stationary object ahead of you, as for
example, at a traffic light or a parked
vehicle. Also, the system does not react to
oncoming traffic, pedestrians or other type
of potential traffic such as a rider on horse-
back. It is also possible that the system
may not detect smaller moving objects
such as motorcycles or bicycles. Be espe-
cially alert when encountering any of these
situations as the system will neither auto-
matically brake, nor provide a warning to
you. Also, be aware that every decrease in
the distance setting allows your vehicle to
come closer to a vehicle in front of you and
requires a heightened amount of alert-
ness.<
If while your vehicle is actively following a
vehicle in front of you and the vehicle
ahead speeds up or the lane ahead
becomes clear, then your vehicle will
accelerate to the speed you have selected.
Be aware that changing to a clear, unob-
structed lane will also result in your vehicle
accelerating.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Driving
80
Be certain to deactivate the system
when you pull into an exit lane for a
highway off-ramp.<
Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered
manner on a highway may cause a delay in
the system's reaction to a vehicle in front of
you or may cause the system to react to a
vehicle actually in the lane next to you.
Always be ready to take action or apply the
brakes if necessary.
Active cruise control can only decelerate
the vehicle to approx. 20 mph (30 km/h). If
the system reduces vehicle speed below
20 mph (30 km/h) or if DSC/ABS is
engaged while driving, the system will
automatically deactivate.
Remember, the system cannot stop
your vehicle. In addition, the system is
deactivated whenever the driver applies
the vehicle brakes, shifts the transmission
from drive/D to neutral/N, or deactivates
DSC. After any deactivation, the system
will no longer automatically activate the
vehicle brakes, which means the driver
must intervene and resume manual
braking. You should then reactivate the
system only when you are fully aware of the
prior speed and distance settings.<
Active cruise control may brake when you
reduce the stored desired speed; however,
the driver must constantly monitor traffic
and intervene if necessary.
When you switch off the engine or ignition,
active cruise control is fully switched off,
too, and any settings you have selected are
canceled.
Behavior in curves
Because of the limited range of the system,
it is possible that in curves or on the peaks
and valleys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead
may be recognized late, or not at all. There-
fore, it is up to the driver to select a speed
that is prudent in view of the curves and
terrain of the roadway.
In approaching a curve, it is possible that
active cruise control would react briefly to a
vehicle in the adjacent lane. In addition, the
system can sense if your vehicle is in a
curve and may not accelerate. If your
vehicle decelerates in either case, you can
choose to overcome the deceleration by
briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
Driver interventions
Anytime the driver presses down on
the accelerator pedal, any automatic
braking action by the system is interrupted
until the pedal is fully released. After doing
this, release the accelerator and the system
again controls your cruising speed and dis-
tance setting. While driving with activated
system, resting your foot on the accelerator
pedal will cause the system not to brake
even if necessary. Be certain that floormats
or other objects on the vehicle floor do not
interfere with movement of the accelerator
pedal.<
While active cruise control is capable
of braking your vehicle automatically
when you approach a slower vehicle
ahead, it is important to be aware that the
ability of the system to apply the brakes is
also limited, if you are driving down a steep
grade or when you reduce your desired
speed sharply. The system cannot stop
your vehicle. It uses only a portion of
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
81
braking system capacity and does not uti-
lize the full capacity of the vehicle braking
system. Therefore, the system cannot
decrease your speed for large differences
in speed between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Examples: during emer-
gency braking, when you approach a
vehicle traveling at a much lower speed
than your own speed such as approaching
a toll booth or when a much slower vehicle
cuts in front of you at close range.<
Whenever active cruise control
recognizes a situation that
requires driver braking because
the system capacity has been
reached or has been exceeded,
the system alerts the driver by flashing this
symbol in the instrument cluster and
sounding a chime.
Swerving vehicles
When a vehicle moves from an adjacent
lane into your lane, active cruise control will
not recognize this vehicle until it is fully in
your lane ahead of your vehicle.
Malfunctions
The build-up of foreign material – e.g.,
snow, ice, dirt, road debris, etc. – can lead
to reduced detection performance of active
cruise control. You should check the
sensor under the front bumper and clean it
as necessary prior to driving your vehicle. If
the sensor becomes covered by foreign
material or has a malfunction, it is possible
that the sensor will no longer be able to
detect vehicles in front of you. After the
system recognizes that the sensor is no
longer functional, a message is displayed
in the Check Control and an acoustic signal
is emitted, refer to page 85. Also observe
the additional information provided in the
Control Center.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Everything under control
82
Everything under control
Odometer, outside temperature display, clock
When the ignition is off you can briefly acti-
vate the time, outside temperature and
odometer displays by pressing the knob at
the upper left of the Info Display.
1 Outside temperature display, clock
The outside temperature and the time dis-
plays are active starting at the radio mode
in the ignition lock.
You can change the units of measure
– 6/7– in the "Settings" menu, refer to
page 91.
Setting the clock, refer to page 91.
Ice warning
A warning signal sounds when the outside
temperature falls to roughly +37.57
(+36); this is accompanied by a message
in the Check Control.
Please bear in mind that the ice
warning does nothing to alter the fact
that glare ice may be present on roads at
temperatures higher than +37.57 (+36),
for instance, on bridges and shade-
covered surfaces.<
2 Odometer
The odometer panel also provides displays
for the computer and the Check Control.
Regardless of the current display mode,
you can view the odometer reading for a
short period by pressing the knob at the
upper left of the Info Display.
Check Control, refer to page 85.
Computer, refer to page 86.
3 Trip odometer
The trip odometer must be present in the
display before you can reset it to zero.
Reset by pressing the knob at the upper left
of the Info Display.
Tachometer
The orange warning sector gradually
moves upward as the engine warms to its
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
83
normal operating temperature. The seg-
ments disappear in sequence as the engine
warms to its normal operating temperature.
Avoid allowing the engine speed to rise as
far as the orange warning sector whenever
possible.
Service Interval Display
Info Display screen contents
The distance/period remaining until your
next service briefly appears when you
switch on the ignition.
The Info Display immediately
switches to its computer mode when
you press one of the two buttons in the turn
signal lever, refer to page 86.<
Control Display screen contents
You can view additional information on ser-
vice and maintenance procedures by
selecting the "Car data" menu.
1. Select and confirm
2. Select "Service" and confirm
3. The display shows a list of selected ser-
vice and maintenance procedures, as
well as legally-mandated official
inspections.
Red sectors
The service deadline has already passed.
Yellow sectors
The deadline for service or an official
inspection is approaching. Please contact
your BMW center for an appointment.
Green lamps
No service is currently required. If you
desire, certain maintenance operations can
be carried out at the next service at the
customer's request.
You can request more detailed information
on every entry.
Turn the controller to scroll through the list,
then confirm the selected entry.
Confirm to exit the list.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Everything under control
84
Confirm to exit the display.
The Service Interval Display does not
continue counting down to the next
service during periods when the vehicle is
stored with the battery disconnected or the
battery switch OFF.
Please remember that brake fluid should
be changed every two years at the latest,
even if the display does not yet indicate
that service is required, refer to page 192.
This same precaution applies to all of the
other service and maintenance operations
scheduled according to periodic intervals,
as opposed to mileage.<
Displaying and entering dates for
legally prescribed emission and
vehicle inspections
1. Select "Emissions inspection" or "State
inspection" and confirm
2. Turn the controller to select date input
3. Confirm the inspection date. The first
part of the date entry is activated – here
month.
> Turn to reset
> Press to store and move to the next
entry – here year.
The system adopts the date the last
time you store your entry
4. Press the controller to select
"CONFIRM".
A requirement is that you have cor-
rectly set the date and time in the
Control Display, refer to page 91.<
Info Display screen contents
If the deadline for your next emissions or
state vehicle inspection is approaching, the
remaining distance and time will appear
briefly when you switch on the ignition.
Your Service Advisor will determine
your vehicle's current service require-
ments by reading out the data stored in the
vehicle's key.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
85
Check Control
Info Display screen contents
Messages and status reports appear in text
form accompanied by an indicator lamp
symbol. The alert is accompanied by a
gong.
Status reports warning of system malfunc-
tions are assigned one of two priority rat-
ings:
Priority 1:
These status messages and malfunction
reports are signaled by a gong. Simulta-
neous defects will be displayed consecu-
tively. These messages cannot be deleted,
and they remain in the display until the
problem is corrected. Supplementary infor-
mation is also shown in the Control Display,
refer to Automatic display in the Control
Display.
Priority 2:
These status messages and malfunction
reports appear in the Info Display for
approx. 20 seconds.
Briefly press the CHECK button on the turn
signal indicator lever to cancel the mes-
sage in the display, if allowed by priority
rating.
Selecting stored status reports for viewing
in the Control Display, refer to next page.
Check Control symbol and messages
in the Control Display
Depending on the status of the monitored
systems, the Check Control symbol
appears in different colors.
Green
No malfunctions are present in the moni-
tored systems.
Yellow or red
A defect or malfunction has been detected
in the monitored system. Depending upon
how serious the problem is, a supplemen-
tary message may also appear in the Con-
trol Display.
Selecting stored status reports for viewing
in the Control Display, refer to next page.
The symbol in the status line also indi-
cates the status of the Service Interval
Display, refer to page 24.<
Automatic display in the Control
Display
These supplementary messages are
intended to assist you in assessing the
severity of malfunctions; they provide you
with the information you need to decide on
the best way to respond.
Select and confirm to switch off the
display.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Everything under control
86
Selecting stored status reports for
viewing in the Control Display
1. Select "Car data"
2. Select and confirm
3. Select "Check" and confirm
4. The stored status reports appear in the
display. Select the desired report and
confirm your selection.
The display disappears when
the symbol is acknowledged.
Displays after completion of trip
Selected malfunction reports generated
during the trip are shown consecutively
when you switch off the ignition.
If indicated, the following message may
also appear:
"Parking lamps on!"
This message appears when you open the
driver's door after parking. A supplemen-
tary gong is also heard.
Even with the ignition and Info Display off,
you can reactivate the screen and display
the messages.
Press the CHECK button for approx.
8 seconds, refer to page 85. The stored
status reports appear again in the display.
If several messages are present, you can
continue to press the CHECK button to
view them in succession.
The Check Control function
> cancels itself automatically after a brief
period
> can be canceled by again pressing the
CHECK button for approximately
8 seconds.
You can select the language in which
Check Control status reports and
messages from the computer will appear,
refer to page 91.<
Computer
To select functions:
You can use the buttons in the turn signal
indicator lever to request a display from the
computer on the Info Display, starting at
the radio mode in the ignition lock.
1 Info Display on left
2 Info Display on right
A new function appears each time you
press the button.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
87
Info Display screen contents
The display sequence:
> Fuel gauge, refer to next column
> Range and remaining distance, refer to
next colum and page 88.
The display sequence:
> Odometer 82
> Energy Control/ Current fuel
consumption 88
> Average fuel consumption 88
> Average speed 88
> Time of arrival 88.
Maintain pressure on button 1 to
cancel the display from the computer.
Press the button again to return to the last
display.
It will not be possible to cancel the display
if the fuel level has fallen into the reserve
range or if a Check Control status report is
currently on the screen.
Press the button again to view the last dis-
play.<
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge mode appears automati-
cally once the fuel level falls into the
reserve range. At the same time the words
"Fuel reserve" appear. The tank still con-
tains approx. 2.6 gallons (10 liters) of fuel.
It will not be possible to cancel the
computer display once the fuel level
drops into the reserve range. However, you
can still request a display of the travel
range. Computer, refer to page 86.<
Tank capacity: approx. 23.2 gallons
(88 liters).
If the tilt of the vehicle varies, when you are
driving in mountainous areas, for example,
the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Refuel well before the tank is empty,
as otherwise engine functions will not
be ensured and damage can occur if you
drive down to the last drop.<
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range
available with the remaining fuel. The
system calculates the cruising range based
on operating conditions and the amount of
fuel remaining in the tank. The basis for the
calculations is the average fuel consump-
tion over the preceding 20 miles (30 km).
Always refuel as soon as possible
once your cruising range falls to
below 30 miles (50 kilometers), as other-
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Everything under control
88
wise engine functions are not ensured and
damage can occur.<
Refueling is only registered by the com-
puter for fuel amounts above approx.
1.3 gallons (5 liters).
Distance to destination
When you enter a destination in the naviga-
tion system or manually enter a distance in
the computer prior to departure, the
system can also display the distance
remaining to your destination, refer to
page 132 or 89.
The system automatically adopts the dis-
tance to your destination using the route
recommended by the navigation system.
When you enter a destination in the
navigation system, any manual
entries will be overwritten no later than
once 1,640 ft (500 meters) of the calcu-
lated distance have elapsed.<
Energy Control/
Current fuel consumption
Shows your current fuel consumption rate
in mpg – in liters/100 km on Canadian vehi-
cles. This allows you to see whether your
current driving style is conducive to fuel
economy with minimum exhaust emis-
sions.
When the vehicle is stationary the display
goes to the maximum reading, zero on
Canadian models.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated
for the time during which the engine is run-
ning.
You can use the Control Display to view
your fuel consumption rate over two dif-
ferent distances, refer to Computer or Trip
computer.
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the
engine off are not included in the calcula-
tions of average speed.
Time of arrival
A display of your estimated time of arrival is
available whenever you enter a destination
in the navigation system, refer to page 132,
or enter the distance manually in the com-
puter, refer to page 89, prior to departure.
This function is only available if the
time in the Control Display has been
correctly set, refer to page 91.<
Control Display screen contents
You can activate the computer function at
any time by selecting it from the "Car data"
menu.
The computer furnishes you with a choice
between two display options.
Computer
> Time of arrival
> Distance to destination.
Enter a destination in the navigation
system, or enter a distance in the
computer manually, refer to page 132
or 89
> Cruising range
> Average fuel consumption
> Average speed.
You can reset calculations of both
average speed and average fuel con-
sumption to zero. Select the menu entry
and confirm.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
89
Trip computer
Reset all data to zero:
Select "START / RESET" and confirm.
> Time of departure
> Driving time
> Elapsed distance
> Average fuel consumption since
"START / RESET"
> Average speed since
"START / RESET".
Entering a distance manually
1. Select computer "BC"
2. Select and activate the "Distance" entry
function. Turn the controller to the left
or right to select the distance to your
destination
3. Press the controller to confirm your
entry.
Setting and revising speed limit
1. Select "Limit" and confirm your selec-
tion
2. Select "SET" and confirm.
3. Turn the controller to the left or right to
select the preset speed
4. Press the controller to confirm your
entry. The speed limit function is now
active.
To switch off or switch on again
1. Select "Limit" and confirm your selec-
tion
2. Select "ON / OFF" and confirm. "ON /
OFF" is highlighted when the speed
limit function is activated.
Adopting your current speed as the
limit
1. Select "Limit" and confirm your selec-
tion
2. Select and confirm. This resets
the stopwatch to zero and then restarts
it. The system adopts your current
speed as the limit.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Everything under control
90
Info Display screen contents
If, for instance, the warning sector in the
tachometer is visible, refer to page 82, the
speed limit will be indicated by a warning
sector in the speedometer, see arrow.
A message appears in the Check Control
when you exceed the preset speed limit.
Vehicle speed must fall back to at least
3 mph (5 km/h) below the preset speed
before the speed warning will be repeated.
Stopwatch
Starting and stopping
1. Select and confirm
2. Select and confirm. The stopwatch
is reset to 0 and started
3. Select and confirm. This stops the
timer.
Confirm again to reset the stopwatch to
zero.
Taking an intermediate time reading
Select "INTERM. TIME" and confirm. This
intermediate time appears below the
ongoing primary stopwatch count.
All of the remaining functions remain
available at all times while the stop-
watch is running. The stopwatch continues
operation in the background.<
Assistance window* for "Car data"
You can select any of the following com-
puter functions for display in the assistance
window:
> Computer
> Trip computer
> Speed limit
> Stopwatch
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
91
Importing display
1. Select the desired function and confirm
– here, computer "BC"
2. Select and confirm. This resets
the stopwatch to zero and then restarts
it. The function appears in the assis-
tance window.
The symbol is highlighted if
the function displayed in the asssis-
tance window is selected in the Control
Display. You can also choose to view brief
help texts explaining selected menu
entries, refer to page 23, or the travel route
on vehicles equipped with a GPS naviga-
tion system, refer to page 131.<
Changing settings
Units of measure and display format
You can select the units of measure used in
the displays of fuel consumption, dis-
tances, temperatures and pressures as
well as the display format for the time and
date.
1. Select and confirm.
2. Select the menu entry that you wish to
adjust. Press repeatedly to view a
listing of your selection options.
Language
You can select a different language for the
text displays.
1. Select and confirm.
2. Select and activate the desired lan-
guage.
Time and date
Select "Clock" and confirm.
Setting the time
Select "Time" and confirm. The first setting
sector is highlighted.
> Turn to reset
> Press to store your entry and proceed
to the next setting.
The clock adopts your entry the last
time you confirm your entry.
Memo
You will hear four tones just before each full
hour.
> Select "Memo" and confirm. "Memo" is
highlighted when this function is acti-
vated.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Everything under control
92
Setting the date
Select "Date" and confirm. The first section
of the date display is highlighted –
here: day.
> Turn to reset
> Press to store and highlight the next
entry – here: month and year.
The system adopts the date the last
time you store your entry
Brightness
You can set the brightness of the screen.
1. Select and confirm.
Select "Brightness" and confirm your
selection. Press and turn the controller to
make the adjustment.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
93
Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
The PDC assists you when you are parking.
Signal tones indicate the current distance
to an object behind or in front of your
vehicle. Four ultrasonic sensors in both the
bumpers monitor the distance to the
nearest object. The sensors at the front and
at the two rear corners have a range of
approx. 2 ft (60 cm); the rear middle sen-
sors have approx. 5 ft (1.50 m).
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed,
as otherwise the physical circumstances
would mean that the system warning was
too late.<
Automatic function
Whenever the ignition is on the system
automatically assumes operational status
after a few seconds each time you engage
the transmission position R.
Wait this short period before
reversing.<
Switching on manually
Press the button, the indicator lamp lights
up.
Manual deactivation
Press the button again; the indicator lamp
goes out.
Automatic deactivation
The system is automatically deactivated
once the vehicle travels approx. 165 ft
(50 m) or exceeds a speed of roughly
20 mph (30 km/h); the indicator lamp goes
out. You can reactivate the system manu-
ally as needed.
Acoustic signals
The signal indicating the distance to the
nearest obstacle is directional. Thus, an
object detected to the left rear of the
vehicle will be indicated by a signal tone
from the left rear speaker, etc. As the
distance between vehicle and object
decreases, the intervals between the tones
become shorter. The signal tone becomes
continuous once the distance to the
nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft
(30 cm).
The warning signal is canceled after
approx. 3 seconds when the distance to an
object remains constant during this time,
if you are moving parallel to a wall, for
instance.
Malfunctions
The indicator lamp within the button
flashes and a status message appears in
the Check Control.
Please take note of the supplementary
information provided in the Control Display.
Switch the system off and have the cause
of the malfunction corrected by your BMW
center.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
94
PDC with visual warning
You also enjoy the option of having the
system show distances to objects in the
Control Display. The Control Display will
also indicate the presence of objects in
green before they are close enough to gen-
erate a signal tone.
Select "PDC pic." from the "Settings" menu
and confirm your selection. This activates
the PDC display.
The display then appears in the Control
Display whenever the PDC is automatically
or manually activated.
The previous display automatically reap-
pears after the system is deactivated.
Confirm in the menu to return to
the previous display.<
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always
remains with the driver. Even when sensors
are involved, there is a blind spot in which
objects cannot be detected. The system is
also subject to the physical limits that apply
to all forms of ultrasonic measurement,
such as those encountered with tow bars
and trailer couplings, as well as thin and
wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects
already displayed, e.g. a curb, can also dis-
appear from the detection area of the sen-
sors again before a continuous tone
sounds.
Loud noises from outside and inside the
vehicle may prevent you from hearing
PDC's signal tone.<
Keep the sensors clean and free of ice
or snow in order to ensure that they
will continue to operate effectively.
Do not apply high pressure spray to the
sensors for a prolonged period of time.
Keep the spray at least 4 in (10 cm) away
from the sensors.<
Driving stability control/
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Your BMW is equipped with an extended
array of systems designed to enhance and
maintain vehicle stability under extreme
conditions. The following section describes
these functions based on DSC and ABS.
The concept
DSC maintains vehicle stability, even in
critical driving situations.
The system optimizes vehicle stability
during acceleration and when starting from
a full stop, as well as optimizing traction.
The system recognizes any tendency for
the vehicle to assume an unstable attitude
such as oversteer or understeer; it then
counteracts this tendency with a combina-
tion of graduated reductions in engine
torque and selective braking intervention at
individual wheels. DSC provides optimal
stability within the limits defined by the
laws of physics.
The DSC is operational every time you start
the engine. DSC includes the functionality
of the DTC Dynamic Traction Control and
DBC Dynamic Brake Control.
With its selective braking intervention at the
individual drive wheels, DTC fulfills the
same function as a conventional limited-
slip differential to enhance traction under
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
95
difficult driving conditions, such as on
snow, etc.
Indicator lamps
The indicator lamp in the Info Dis-
play goes out soon after you start
the engine.
If the indicator lamp flashes:
DSC controls the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp stays lit:
DSC has been switched off via the Control
Display.
The indicator lamp and the brake
warning lamp remain on continu-
ously:
DSC, DTC and DBC have been
deactivated or a system malfunc-
tion is present.
When the system is off, the stability main-
tenance functions described above are no
longer available. The vehicle will remain
completely operational, however, without
DSC.
Please respond to any malfunctions by
referring the problem to your BMW center.
Indicator and warning lamps on
Canadian models.
Activating DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
You may find it useful to briefly activate
DTC under the following special circum-
stances:
> When rocking the vehicle and starting
off in deep snow or on loose road sur-
faces
> When ascending snow-covered hills,
and when driving in deep or on hard-
packed snow
> When driving with snow chains.
Select "Settings". Select "DTC" and con-
firm your entry. DTC is now activated. The
DTC indicator lamp in the Info Display
lights up.
When DTC is active, DSC provides
only limited system response up to a
speed of approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).
Control intervention to maintain stability is
reduced.<
Deactivating DTC
Select "Settings". Select "DTC" and con-
firm your entry. DTC is now deactivated.
The DTC indicator lamp in the Info Display
goes out.
Deactivating DSC
Select "Settings". Select "DSC" and con-
firm your entry. DSC is deactivated. The
indicator lamp in the Info Display remains
on continuously.
Deactivating DSC automatically deacti-
vates DTC as well. The systems for
enhancing stability and traction are deacti-
vated, and there is no active braking inter-
vention or torque control.
A status report appears in the Check Con-
trol. Please take note of the additional
information in the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
96
To maintain optimal stability, drive
with the system on whenever pos-
sible.<
Reactivating DSC
Select "Settings". Select "DSC" and con-
firm your entry. DSC is now activated. The
indicator lamp in the Info Display goes out.
The laws of physics cannot be
repealed, even with DSC. An approp-
riate driving style always remains the
responsibility of the driver. Avoid using the
additional safety margin provided by the
system as an excuse for taking unneces-
sary risks.
When DTC is active, DSC provides only
limited system response up to a speed of
approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). Interven-
tion for stability-enhancement is reduced.
Do not make any modifications to the DSC
system. Never allow anyone other than
authorized professional technicians to
carry out service or repairs on the DSC
system.<
DBC Dynamic Brake Control
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this
system automatically produces the max-
imum braking force boost and thus helps to
achieve the shortest possible braking dis-
tance during panic stops. This system
exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake
pedal for the duration of the brake applica-
tion. When the brake pedal is released, the
DBC is deactivated.
In the event of a malfunction, the
warning lamp comes on with a
yellow light. Have the system
checked and repaired at your BMW center
as soon as possible.
Check Control messages, refer to page 85.
Please note the supplementary information
provided in the Control Display.
Warning lamp on Canadian models.
Driving stability control/
ABS Antilock Braking
System
The concept
ABS enhances active safety by preventing
the wheels from locking under braking.
ABS incorporates CBC and EBV.
In case of malfunction
If the indicator lamp lights up in
yellow, this indicates that ABS has
been deactivated in response to a
system malfunction. Conventional braking
efficiency remains available without limita-
tions. Please have the system inspected at
your BMW center.
CBC Cornering Brake Control
CBC is a technical advance based on ABS.
It provides further enhancements in vehicle
stability and steering response during lane
changes and cornering at high rates of lat-
eral acceleration.
EBV Electronic brake-force
distribution
EBV controls the brake system's applica-
tion pressure at the rear wheels to ensure
stable deceleration.
In case of malfunction
If the brake system warning lamp
lights up in red, appearing together
with the yellow indicator lamps for
ABS and DSC: the stability control
is no longer operational.
If all three lamps light up in yellow:
malfunction in the stability control
systems.
While you may continue, you should
remember to proceed cautiously and drive
defensively while avoiding full brake appli-
cations.
Please have the system checked at the
nearest BMW center.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
97
Check Control messages, refer to page 85.
Please note the supplementary information
provided in the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps on
Canadian models.
Dynamic Drive
The concept
Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and
optimizes vehicle stability during cornering
and evasive maneuvers.
Active stabilizers at the front and rear axles
form the basis for Dynamic Drive. Suspen-
sion compliance adapts to suit driving con-
ditions, varying from performance-oriented
during cornering to smooth and comfort-
oriented when the vehicle is proceeding in
a straight line.
The system assumes operational status
each time you start the engine.
Driving with Dynamic Drive
During vehicle operation, the system con-
tinuously runs through closed-loop control
cycles lasting only fractions of a second.
In case of malfunction
The symbol will light up, accompa-
nied by a status message in the
Check Control. Please take note of
the additional information in the Control
Display.
You can find more detailed information on
the Check Control starting on page 85.
If the Dynamic Drive system switches
off in response to malfunction, please
remember to adapt your speed accord-
ingly, especially in curves.
The suspension will be noticeably softer
and the vehicle will display a greater ten-
dency to tilt during cornering and in cross-
winds.
If a Check Control message stating that
you should stop appears in addition to the
red symbol, stop immediately and switch
off the engine. In this case the oil level in
the reservoir may have dropped below the
minimum, possibly owing to a leak in the
hydraulic system.
Please observe the additional instructions
provided in the Control Display.<
EDC Electronic Damping
Control*
The suspension responds to changes in
factors such as road surface, or operating
conditions such as steering and braking, by
adapting to the new conditions within frac-
tions of a second.
Comfort program
The system automatically assumes opera-
tion in its Comfort mode each time you start
the engine; this mode is suitable for use
throughout the vehicle's entire speed range
and regardless of load.
Sport program
Activate in "Settings" menu with the igni-
tion on.
You should select the Sport program for
consistently performance-oriented
response from shock absorbers and
steering.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
98
Flat Tire Monitor*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor keeps track of the
inflation pressures in your tires as you
drive. The system provides an alert when-
ever the inflation pressure drops signifi-
cantly below the specified pressure in one
or more tires.
In order for the Flat Tire Monitor to 'learn'
the correct tire inflation pressure, check the
inflation pressure in all tires against the
inflation pressure table on page 185 and
make corrections as necessary. Then pro-
ceed to initialize the system.
This symbol will appear in the
Check Control to inform you that
the inflation pressure of a tire has
fallen significantly. A text message appears
at the same time.
Please take note of the additional informa-
tion in the Control Display.
You can find more information on the
Check Control starting on page 85.
The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate
sudden severe tire damage caused
by outside factors and does not detect a
natural, even pressure drop in all four
tires.<
Initializing the system
1. Switch ignition on, do not start the
engine
2. Select "RPA" from the "Settings" menu
and confirm your selection. The initial-
ization menu appears.
"YES"
Select and confirm. The Flat Tire Monitor
starts an automatic 'learning' process as
the car is driven, and memorizes these ref-
erence pressures. This one-off learning
takes at least 10 minutes, after which the
Flat Tire Monitor is able to detect and indi-
cate a flat tire.
Repeat this process after any changes in
tire inflation pressure, tire rotation or
replacement.
"NO"
Select and confirm to return to the "Set-
tings" menu.
Flat tire
The symbol will light up red, accompanied
by a status message in the Check Control.
> Vehicles with standard tires:
If this occurs, reduce vehicle speed
immediately and stop the vehicle. Avoid
hard and sudden steering and braking
maneuvers. Replace the defective tire
> Vehicles with run-flat tires:
If this occurs, carefully but quickly
reduce vehicle speed to below 50 mph
(80 km/h). Avoid hard and sudden
steering and braking maneuvers.
Additional information on run-flat tires
is provided on page 186.
Please take note of the additional informa-
tion in the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
99
Check the tire inflation pressure regu-
larly and correct it if necessary, refer
to page 185.
Do not initialize the system when snow
chains are fitted. False alarms and unde-
tected loss of pressure may occur in such
situations.
When driving on snow-covered or slippery
surfaces, it may take some time for a loss of
tire pressure to be indicated.
A sports driving style – spinning of the
driven wheels, high lateral accelerations –
can likewise result in a delayed response
from the Flat Tire Monitor.<
System malfunctions
The symbol will appear in yellow in the
Check Control and a message will appear.
Please refer to the additional information
supplied in the Control Display, and have
the system inspected at your BMW center.
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*
The concept
TPM monitors inflation pressures in all four
tires while you drive. The system provides
an alert whenever the inflation pressure
drops significantly below the specified
pressure in one or more tires.
To initialize TPM, start by checking the
inflation pressures in all four tires and com-
paring them with those specified in the
table on page 185, correcting them as nec-
essary.Then proceed to initialize the
system.
This symbol will appear in the
Check Control to inform you when
the inflation pressure varies from
that stored in the system. A text message
appears at the same time.
Please take note of the additional informa-
tion in the Control Display.
You can find more information on the
Check Control starting on page 85.
The TPM cannot alert you to severe
and sudden tire damage caused by
external factors.<
Initializing the system
1. With the vehicle parked, switch on the
ignition
2. Select "TPM" from the "Settings" menu
and confirm your selection. The initial-
ization menu appears.
"INITIALIZE"
1. Select and confirm
2. TPM is initialized. A message appears
in the Check Control
3. After several minutes of driving TPM will
adopt the tires' current inflation pres-
sures as its references.
The current data appear in the Control
Display. These figures are more accu-
rate than those that appear on the infla-
tion gauges at filling stations, etc.
The only time you will need to repeat this
procedure is after correcting your tire pres-
sures. Because TPM automatically
assumes operation each time you switch
on the ignition, it is on duty whenever you
drive.
If the system detects a flat tire during
the initialization process, the tires in
the Control Display will appear in red.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Technology for comfort, convenience and safety
100
Do not start the initialization
Select and confirm to return to the
"Settings" menu.
Status indicators in the Control
Display
The status of the system is indicated by the
color of the tires.
TPM takes into account that the tire pres-
sure changes during driving. A correction is
only required when the TPM requests that
the driver takes action by changing the
color.
Green
Tire inflation pressures correspond to the
initialized level.
Yellow
The inflation pressures in the tires have
fallen to below the specified level, which is
normal in every tire after a certain amount
of time.
This alerts you to have the tires inflated to
the specified pressures as soon as pos-
sible.
Red
Pressure loss in indicated tire.
If this occurs, reduce vehicle speed imme-
diately and stop the vehicle. Avoid hard
and sudden steering and braking maneu-
vers.
Black
The system is being initialized.
The system needs several minutes to com-
plete the initialization process, after which
it is ready to detect and report tire prob-
lems.
In the event of loss in tire pressure
If the indicator lamp symbol in the Check
Control lights up in yellow, and a message
also appears, this indicates that the infla-
tion pressures in the tires have fallen to
below the specified level, which is normal
in every tire after a certain amount of time.
This alerts you to have the tires inflated to
the specified pressures as soon as pos-
sible.
Please take note of the additional informa-
tion in the Control Display.
If you are prompted to check the tire
pressure shortly after a correction has
been made, this indicates that the cor-
rected values were not accurate. Please
check the inflation pressure again and
make corrections according to the inflation
pressure table. Then reinitialize the
system.<
Flat tire
If you have a flat tire, the indicator lamp
symbol in the Check Control will light up in
red, and a message will appear. In addition,
a gong sounds.
> Vehicles with standard tires:
If this occurs, reduce vehicle speed
immediately and stop the vehicle. Avoid
hard and sudden steering and braking
maneuvers. Replace the defective tire
> Vehicles with run-flat tires:
If this occurs, carefully but quickly
reduce vehicle speed to below 50 mph
(80 km/h). Avoid hard and sudden
steering and braking maneuvers.
Additional information on run-flat tires
is provided on page 186.
The spare tire provided with your
vehicle is equipped with the elec-
tronics required to support TPM operation;
once the spare is installed, the pressure in
this tire will also be monitored following
system initialization.
Have the tires changed at your BMW
center.
Your BMW center has the information
needed for working with TPM and is
equipped with the necessary special
tools.<
System malfunctions
Other equipment operating on the same
radio frequency as TPM can generate inter-
ference signals that may prevent the
system from operating as intended.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
101
The symbol will appear in yellow in the
Check Control and a message will appear.
You will also see the same message
> in the event of a system fault
> if a wheel is mounted without the
appropriate TPM electronics
> if, in addition to the spare tire, addi-
tional wheels with TPM electronics are
on board.
Please refer to the additional information
supplied in the Control Display, and have
the system inspected at your BMW center.
Self-leveling suspension*
In the event of malfunction
A Check Control message
appearing together with this symbol
indicates a malfunction in the self-
leveling suspension. Please take note of
the additional information in the Control
Display.
Stop and inspect the vehicle. If the rear of
the vehicle is visibly lower than the front,
possibly accompanied by a tilt noticeable
when you compare the left rear with the
right rear, you should respond by immedi-
ately proceeding to the nearest BMW
center. Drive with appropriate caution in
the meantime. The vehicle has reduced
ground clearance and driving comfort may
be noticeably reduced. Even if the attitude
of the vehicle is normal, you should consult
the nearest BMW center if the warning
lamp indicates a system fault.
Adaptive brake lamp
The adaptive brake lamp indicates the
intensity with which you are applying your
brakes to drivers of following vehicles.
The display consists of two stages:
> Normal braking:
The brake lamps in the tail lamp assem-
blies and the high-mount brake lamp on
the rear tray light up during braking
> Heavy braking and braking with ABS:
The tail lamps also light up with the
same intensity as the standard brake
lamp units to enhance the warning
effect of the brake lamps.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Lamps
102
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
Parking lamps/side marker lamps
With the switch in this position, the
front, rear and side vehicle lighting
is switched on. You can use the side
marker lamps for parking. For lighting on
one side for parking as an additional fea-
ture, refer to page 103.
Low beams
When you switch off the ignition
with the headlamps on, the head-
lamps go out, and only the parking
lamps remain on.
Follow-me-home lamps:
After parking the vehicle and
switching off the headlamps, you can use
the headlamp flasher control to activate
the low beams for a period of roughly
40 seconds. You also have the options of
extending this period or, as an alternative,
having this function deactivated.<
Lights on warning
If you switch off the ignition while the head-
lamps are on, when you subsequently open
the driver's door a gong will sound for sev-
eral seconds, while the Check Control will
provide you with a message
.
Daytime driving lamps*
If you wish, you can leave the light switch in
the low-beam position:
All external lamps go out when you switch
off the ignition.
Always observe all applicable laws gover-
ning the use of daytime driving lamps.
You can switch on the parking lamps when
needed using the standard procedure
described under Parking lamps.
You can have the daytime driving
lamps on your vehicle programmed to
operate as desired.<
Automatic headlamp control
When you set the switch to this
position, the system activates and
switches on and off the low beams
in response to changes in ambient light
conditions, for instance, in tunnels, at dawn
and dusk, and in rain and snow. The green
indicator lamp next to the symbol is illumi-
nated when the low beams are on.
Following automatic activation the
vehicle's external lighting remains on
when you switch on the fog lamps.<
The automatic headlamp control
cannot serve as a substitute for your
personal judgment in determining when the
lamps should be switched on in response
to ambient lighting conditions.
For example, the system cannot detect fog.
To avoid safety risks, you should always
switch on the lamps manually under these
conditions.<
You can have the sensitivity of the
headlamp control system adjusted on
your vehicle.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
103
Instrument lighting
Turn the serrated dial to adjust the illumina-
tion intensity.
High beams/standing lamps
1 High beams – blue indicator lamp
2 Headlamp flasher – blue indicator lamp
3 Standing lamps
Standing lamps, left and right*
You also enjoy the option of lighting up just
one side of your vehicle when parking:
With the ignition off, press the lever in the
desired direction 3, past the pressure
point.
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams
must be switched on for the fog
lamps to operate. The green indi-
cator lamp in the Info Display lights up
whenever the fog lamps are on.
The fog lamps are switched off whenever
the high beams are switched on.
If the automatic headlamp control is
activated, the low beams will come on
automatically when you switch on the fog
lamps.<
Interior lamps
The interior lamps operate automatically.
Switching the interior lamps on and
off manually
Briefly press button 1.
If you want the interior lamps to remain off
continuously, maintain pressure on the
button for approx. 3 seconds.
To revert to normal operation, press the
button briefly.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Lamps
104
The button for the interior lamps in the rear
passenger area only switches these lamps
on and off.
The interior lamps come on briefly
whenever you use the parked-car
ventilation system. This feature confirms
that the system has been activated.<
Control of the footwell lamps, courtesy
lamps and ground lamps is also automatic.
Reading lamps
Reading lamps are provided in the front
and rear
* adjacent to the interior lamps.
You can switch them on and off with the
button 2 adjacent to each lamp.
To avoid discharging the battery, all of
the vehicle's interior lamps are auto-
matically extinguished approx. 15 minutes
after the ignition is switched off.<
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs
Light-emitting diodes installed behind
translucent lenses serve as the light source
for many of the controls and displays in
your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes,
which operate using a concept similar to
that applied in conventional lasers, are offi-
cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting
diodes.
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light several
hours, as irritation of the iris could result. <
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
105
A congenial climate
Automatic climate control
1 Automatic climate control
2 Airflow directed toward the windshield
and side windows
3 Airflow for the upper body
The serrated dials in the center open
and close through an infinitely-variable
range to control air supply while also
adjusting the air's direction like the
lower serrated dials. You can find more
information on adjusting for draft-free
ventilation on page 110
4 Air to footwell
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
A congenial climate
106
1 Automatic air distribution and supply –
left-hand side of passenger
compartment 109
2 Outside air/AUC Automatic recircu-
lated-air control/Recirculated air 107
3 Defrosting windows and removing
condensation 107
4 Temperature control – left-hand side of
passenger compartment 107
5 Maximum cooling 107
6 Air supply – left-hand side of passenger
compartment 107
7 To switch off automatic climate
control 109
8 Air supply – right-hand side of
passenger compartment 107
9 Temperature control – right-hand side
of passenger compartment 107
10 Residual heat mode 108
11 Rear window defroster
12 Manually switch air conditioner mode
on and off 107
13 Automatic air distribution and supply –
right-hand side of passenger
compartment 109
14 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
15 Parked-car ventilation system 112
> Activation time set – the indicator
lamp is on
> Parked-car ventilation on – the indi-
cator lamp flashes
All of the remaining adjustment
options available with the automatic
climate control can be found in the Control
Display's "Settings" menu, refer to
page 109.
The current settings for temperature and
airflow appear in the Control Display's
status line.
You can find a description of the Control
Display on page 19.<
A congenial climate
Activate the automatic mode using the
AUTO button or "AUTO" in the Control Dis-
play, refer to page 109. Select the interior
temperature that you find most comfort-
able.
The following section contains more
detailed information on the available set-
ting options.
All of the air conditioning functions,
including Maximum cooling, refer to
page 107, and the rear air conditioner, refer
to page 111, are available only when the
engine is running.<
Your vehicle has been designed to
automatically select your personal cli-
mate-control settings whenever you unlock
the doors using your individually pro-
grammed remote control unit.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
107
Automatic air distribution and supply
The AUTO program adjusts the
airflow and distribution patterns
for you while also using your
preselected temperature setting as the
basis for adjusting the interior climate to
adapt to external influences – summer,
winter.
The air conditioner comes on automatically
when you select the AUTO program.
Temperature adjustment
You can turn to select the
desired temperatures for the
driver's and passenger sides.
Your settings appear in the
Control Display's status line.
The figures in the display provide a general
indication of interior temperature. When
you start the vehicle, this system ensures
that the selected temperature is achieved
as quickly as possible. It then maintains
this temperature, regardless of the season.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
This program quickly removes
ice and condensation from the
windshield and door windows.
Adjusting air supply manually
You can adjust the air supply by
turning. The automatic air
supply control is operational
whenever you see your selec-
tion represented by a bar in the
Control Display's status line. The automatic
air distribution remains in operation as
before. You can reactivate the automatic
air supply mode with the AUTO button.
Switching air conditioner mode on
and off manually
The air conditioner cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before also reheating it as
required, according to temperature setting.
Depending on the weather, the windshield
may fog over briefly when the engine is
started.
The air conditioner comes on automatically
when you select the AUTO program.
Maximum cooling
This program quickly provides
maximum cooling.
The temperature display reverts
to 607 (166) while the
system switches to the recirculated-air
mode and starts to provide maximum air
supply through the vent outlets only. For
this reason you should ensure that these
outlets are open before selecting this pro-
gram.
Outside air/AUC Automatic recircu-
lated-air control/Recirculated air
You can respond to unpleasant
odors or pollutants in the imme-
diate environment by tempo-
rarily suspending the supply of outside air.
The system then recirculates the air cur-
rently within the vehicle. AUC executes this
function automatically.
Press the button repeatedly to run through
the following control sequence:
> Indicator lamps off: outside air flows
into the vehicle
> Left-hand indicator lamp on – AUC
mode: the system detects pollutants
in the outside air and responds by
blocking the supply of outside air when
required. The system then recirculates
the air currently within the vehicle.
Depending upon air quality, in the auto-
matic mode the system may start to
alternate between its outside-air and
recirculated-air modes
> Right-hand indicator lamp on – recircu-
lated-air mode: the supply of outside air
into the vehicle is permanently blocked.
The system then recirculates the air
currently within the vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces during opera-
tion in the recirculated-air mode, you
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
A congenial climate
108
should switch it off while also increasing air
supply as required.<
Residual heat mode
The system uses the warmth
stored in the engine to heat the
interior when the ignition is off,
for instance, while the vehicle
is stopped at a school to pick
up a child.
You can adjust the automatic climate con-
trol's settings when the ignition lock is in
the radio mode. The system blows heated
air into the interior in accordance with the
selected distribution pattern while the igni-
tion is off.
Provided that the engine has warmed
to its normal operating temperature
and the battery is charged, you can use this
function for up to 15 minutes after
switching off the ignition. The LED within
the button lights up to confirm compliance
with both of these conditions.<
Front ventilation
You can adjust the vent outlets for the
upper body to suit your personal require-
ments.
You can use the serrated dials 1 to open
and close the outlets through an infinitely-
variable range, while the serrated dials 2
allow you to adjust the airflow direction.
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of
cool air in your direction, for instance, if the
interior has become too warm, etc.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows
past you and is not directed straight at you.
The airflow temperatures for the indi-
vidual upper-body vent outlets can be
adjusted separately in the Control Display,
refer to page 110.
When the vent outlets are completely
closed, the vents at the top of the cockpit
provide indirect ventilation for the pas-
senger compartment.<
Ventilation for storage compartment
in front armrest
You can use the serrated dial in the storage
compartment to open and close the vent.
Depending upon the temperatures
selected at the rear dials, high tem-
peratures may occur in the storage com-
partment. Close the vent as required.<
Rear ventilation
The serrated dials 1 allow you to open and
close the ventilation outlets through an infi-
nitely-variable range.
You can adjust the airflow direction using
the levers 2.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
109
The serrated dials 3* control the amount of
cooled air in the flow from the vent outlets:
Turn toward blue sector – colder
Turn toward red sector – warmer.
This function allows you to make minor
adjustments for maximum comfort while
also letting you vary temperatures within
the storage compartment.
Switching off automatic climate
control*
The air supply, the heater and
the air conditioner are all
switched off. You can restart
the automatic climate control
by pressing any of its buttons
except the REST button.
Settings in Control Display
With the ignition on, select the "Climate"
menu in the Control Center. The Control
Display provides you with the following set-
ting options:
> "Left A Right":
Separate settings for driver and front
passenger
> To adjust and adapt air-distribution pat-
terns, refer to the next column
> To adjust temperature for the upper
body, refer to page 110
> Storing and calling up an individual set-
ting for interior ventilation outlets, air
distribution and temperature, refer to
page 110.
Select the second page of the "Cli-
mate" menu.
> Select "Indep. ventil.":
For information on activating and deac-
tivating the parked-car ventilation
system and setting the timer, refer to
page 112
> "Seat temp.":
To adjust temperature distribution while
the seat heaters are on, refer to page 51
> "Extra":
Switching the rear air conditioner or
rear cooler on and off, refer to
pages 111, 116
Select the first page of the "Climate"
menu.
Automatic air distribution and supply
"AUTO":
The AUTO program adjusts the air supply
and distribution patterns for you while also
using your preselected temperature setting
as the basis for adjusting the interior cli-
mate to adapt to external influences –
summer, winter.
"Bi-Level":
This program operates in the same way as
the AUTO program, but with airflow
directed toward upper body and into the
footwells.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
A congenial climate
110
Combine the air distribution yourself
You can cancel the AUTO program by
selecting specific air distribution patterns
for your personal comfort.
Adjusting air distribution
You also enjoy the option of adjusting the
air distribution manually to obtain a climate
that is ideally adapted to your personal
requirements. The AUTO program is deac-
tivated.
Select the desired symbol and confirm.
Turn the controller to adjust the air distribu-
tion.
Air to windshield and door
windows
Air to the upper body. You
can also adjust the air tem-
perature of the vent outlets for the upper
body individually, refer to next column
Air to footwell
Adjusting temperature for the upper
body
This function provides you with the option
of making minor adjustments to achieve
maximum comfort.
Use the temperature setting to adjust the
amount of cool air that is added to the air-
flow emerging from the vent outlets for the
upper body. We recommend a moderate
temperature setting, as cooler air helps
promote fatigue-free driving.
Storing and calling up an individual
setting
You can store your individual setting after
adjusting the air distribution manually.
Select "Memorize" and confirm your selec-
tion.
Now you can reselect the preset climate
that precisely reflects your personal
requirements.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
111
Select "Individual" and confirm. The AUTO
program is deactivated.
Particle/activated-charcoal filter
The particle filter removes dust and pollen
from the incoming air. The activated-char-
coal filter provides additional protection by
filtering gaseous pollutants from the out-
side air. Your BMW center replaces this
combined filter as a standard part of your
scheduled maintenance.
You can select a display of more detailed
information in the Service Interval Display,
refer to page 83.
Rear air conditioner*
The following settings and operating
modes can be selected and adjusted sep-
arately on the left and right sides:
1 Adjusting cooling, refer to next column
2 Maximum cooling, refer to next column
3 Adjusting air supply manually, refer to
next column
4 Switching off rear air conditioner, refer
to next column
Switching on rear air conditioner
To switch on the rear air conditioner
> select maximum cooling
> press the OFF button again
> select "Rear air cond." in the Control
Display and confirm your selection, see
below.
When you switch on the rear air con-
ditioning, the rear cooler is switched
on automatically, refer to page 116.<
Adjusting cooling
You can also set the system to
provide the desired level of
cooling by turning. We recom-
mend setting the system for
moderate cooling. When you
start off, the system reaches and then
maintains the desired temperature settings
as quickly as possible, both in summer and
in winter.
Adjusting air supply manually
You can adjust the air supply by
turning.
Maximum cooling
This program quickly provides
maximum cooling.
The system automatically switches to the
recirculated-air mode while a high-speed
stream of air simultaneously emerges from
the vent outlets. For this reason you should
ensure that these outlets are open before
selecting this program.
Switching off rear air conditioner
The air conditioner is switched
off.
Press the button again to switch back on.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
A congenial climate
112
Switching on/off in the Control
Display
1. With the ignition on, select the "Cli-
mate" menu in the Control Center
2. Select the second page of the
"Climate" menu
3. Select "Extra" and confirm
4. Select "Rear air cond." and confirm.
The maximum cooling mode is auto-
matically activated when you switch
on the rear air conditioner in the Control
Display.<
Select "Rear air cond." again and confirm
your entry to deactivate the system.
Rear ventilation
Use the lever 1 to vary the airflow direction.
For additional information on rear ventila-
tion options, refer to page 108.
Parked-car ventilation
system
System operation is controlled using the
Control Display. You can set two different
times for the system to start.
The parked-car ventilation blows air into
the passenger compartment to lower inte-
rior temperatures.
The system remains on for 30 minutes. You
can also switch the system on and off man-
ually. Since the system uses a substantial
amount of electrical current, you should
refrain from activating it twice in succes-
sion without allowing the battery to be
recharged in normal operation between
use.
The parked-car ventilation system is avail-
able for preprogrammed operation at out-
side temperatures above approx. 597
(156) and for direct activation at any tem-
perature, but is not operational when the
vehicle is underway.
The air enters the passenger compartment
through the vent outlets in the instrument
panel, which can be adjusted for both
direction and airflow. These outlets must
be open for the system to operate.
Switching on and off directly
1. Activate the radio mode at the ignition
lock
2. Select "Indep. ventil." on the second
page of the "Climate" menu and confirm
your selection.
Select "Indep. ventil." a second time and
confirm to switch off the system directly.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
113
Preselecting the switch-on time
You can preselect two activation times.
1. Activate the radio mode at the ignition
lock
2. Select "Indep. ventil." from the second
page of the "Climate" menu and confirm
your selection
3. Select "Set time 1" or "Set time 2" and
confirm your selection
4. Enter the desired time
> Turn: set
> Press: confirm.
Activating the timer
Select "Switch. time 1" or "Switch. time 2"
and confirm your selection.
The parked-car ventilation is only
available for activation within the sub-
sequent 24 hours. After this the time will
have to be reconfirmed.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
114
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control
can replace as many as three hand-held
transmitters for various remote-controlled
accessories, such as door openers and
house alarm systems. The integrated uni-
versal remote control registers and stores
signals from the original hand-held trans-
mitters.
The signal of an original hand-held trans-
mitter can be programmed on one of the
three memory keys 1. Following that, each
of the devices can be actuated with the
appropriately-programmed memory key 1.
The indicator lamp 2 flashes to confirm
transmission of the signal.
If the vehicle is sold, the memory keys 1
should be cleared as described on
page 115.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always
inspect the immediate area to make certain
that no people, animals or objects are
within the travel range of the device. Also,
comply with the safety precautions of the
original hand-held transmitter.<
Checking the compatibility
If you see this symbol on the pack-
aging or in the manual supplied with
the original hand-held transmitter, it
is safe to assume that it is compatible with
the integrated universal remote control.
If you have additional questions,
please consult your BMW center or
call 1-800-355-3515.
You can also visit these websites:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark owned
by Johnson Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory keys
2 Indicator lamp
Fixed code hand-held transmitter
1. Switch on the ignition
2. When using for the first time: press both
outer keys 1 for approx. 20 seconds,
maintaining pressure until the indicator
lamp 2 starts to flash. The three
memory keys 1 are cleared
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter
at a distance of approx. 2 in (5 cm) to
8 in (20 cm) from the memory keys 1.
The required distance between
the hand-held transmitter and
memory keys 1 depends on the rele-
vant system of the original hand-held
transmitter used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key
on the original hand-held transmitter
and the desired memory key 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
First, the indicator lamp 2 flashes
slowly. Release both keys 2 as soon as
the indicator lamp flashes rapidly. If the
indicator lamp 2 does not flash quickly
after approx. 15 seconds, choose
another distance
5. To program other original hand-held
transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
The corresponding memory key 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
115
The device can be operated as of ignition
on.
If the device can not be operated after
repeated programming, check
whether the original hand-held transmitter
uses an alternating-code system. To do so,
either read the instructions of the original
hand-held transmitter or press and hold
down the programmed memory key 1 of
the integrated universal remote control. If
the indicator lamp 2 on the integrated uni-
versal remote control flashes quickly for a
brief period and then remains lit up for
approx. two seconds, this indicates that
the original hand-held transmitter is
equipped with an alternating code. In the
case of an alternating-code system, pro-
gram the memory keys 1 as described at
the section on alternating-code transmit-
ters.<
Alternating-code transmitters
Consult the operating instructions of the
unit you wish to set when programming the
integrated universal remote control. Find
out about the possibility for synchroniza-
tion.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please
observe the following supplementary
instructions:
Programming will be easier with the
aid of a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device
2. Program the integrated universal
remote control as described at the sec-
tion on fixed code hand-held transmit-
ters.
3. Localize the key on the receiver of the
device you want to set up, e.g. on the
upper section of the motor
4. Press the key on the receiver of the
device you want to set up. After step 4,
approx. 30 seconds remain for step 5
5. Press the programmed memory key 1
on the integrated universal remote con-
trol three times.
The corresponding memory key 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any additional questions,
please contact your BMW center.<
Clearing memory keys
Individual memory keys 1 can not be
cleared. However, you clear all three
memory keys 1 together as follows:
Press both outer keys 1 of the integrated
universal remote control for approx.
20 seconds, maintaining pressure until the
indicator lamp 2 starts to flash.
Sun blinds*
Rear window blind
Activate by briefly pressing the button in
the driver's door with the ignition lock in the
radio mode.
Window blind for rear side windows
Activate by pressing the desired button
with the ignition lock in the radio mode.
1 Quarter window blind
2 Side window blind
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
116
3 Rear window blind
4 Switching to the other side
The side window blind can not be
extended unless the side window is
closed. If the window is open, the blind will
rise slightly prior to immediately retracting
to its original position.<
Briefly press the safety switch in the
driver's door, refer to page 43. The
indicator lamp must light up. This precau-
tion prevents children from operating the
sun blinds using the rear switches, etc.
Before using always ensure that the sun
blind's travel path is clear and unob-
structed.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the remote control unit from the ignition
lock and close the doors; this precaution
prevents children from using the sun blinds
and injuring themselves, etc.<
Automatically extending and
retracting the sun blinds
You can extend and retract the sun blinds
together by pressing and holding button 3
or the button in the driver's door.
Rear cooler*
The rear cooler is located behind the rear
seats' center armrest.
Activating
Press the button, see arrow 1, the indicator
lamp within the button comes on.
On vehicles equipped with a rear air
conditioner unit, once switched on
the rear cooler operates whenever the
engine is running.
High temperatures in the luggage compart-
ment can affect the temperature in the rear
cooler.
When a low voltage is reached, it is auto-
matically switched off to protect the vehicle
battery.<
Opening
Press button and open cooler, see arrow 2.
Switching on/off in Control Display*
When the rear air conditioner unit is
switched on, the rear cooler operates
whenever the engine is running.<
1. With the ignition on, select the "Cli-
mate" menu in the Control Center
2. Select the second page of the "Cli-
mate" menu
3. Select "Extra" and confirm your selec-
tion
4. Select "Rear refr. box" and confirm.
Select "Rear refr. box" a second time and
confirm to switch the unit off.
Opening
Pull the handle, see arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
117
Glove compartment
Opening
Press button. The glove compartment
opens automatically and the lamps come
on.
Closing
Fold the cover up.
To prevent injury in the event of an
accident, close the glove compart-
ment immediately after use.<
Rechargeable flashlight
The flashlight is located on the left-hand
side of the glove compartment.
It features integral overload protection, so
it can be left in its holder continuously.
Be sure that the flashlight is switched
off when it is inserted into its holder.
Failure to comply with this precaution
could lead to overcharging and damage.<
Storage compartments
A storage compartment is located in the
armrest between the front seats.
1 Open the right cover
2 Open the left cover
A removable coin holder is provided in the
front of the compartment. Press briefly to
open.
The mat within the compartment can be
removed for cleaning.
Depending upon your model specification,
any of the following may be located in the
storage compartment:
> Removable cassette holder
*
> Removable CD holder
*
> Fold-out and removable storage com-
partment
*, e.g. for glasses or portable
phone
> Fold-out and removable litter con-
tainer
*.
Locking storage compartment in the
front armrest
You can use the key to lock the storage
compartment in the armrest.
You can lock the luggage compart-
ment lid and the armrest storage
compartment separately, refer to page 39,
and then retain the key in your possession
while handing over only the remote control
unit when leaving the vehicle for valet
parking, etc., refer to page 34; this pre-
vents unauthorized access to the luggage
and front storage compartments.<
Ventilating storage compartment in
the front armrest
You can use the serrated dial in the storage
compartment to open and close the vent.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
118
Depending on the automatic climate
control setting, the temperature
within the storage compartment may be
higher than in the rest of the interior. Close
the vent as required.<
Storage compartment on center
console between the front seats
Open by pressing the recess on the cover.
Glasses compartment
To open the compartment:
Briefly press the button.
You can remove the insert tray for cleaning.
Storage compartment in the center
console
To open the compartment:
Briefly press the button.
Clothes hooks
When suspending clothing from the
hooks ensure that it will not obstruct
the driver's vision. Do not hang heavy
objects on the hooks. If you do so, they
could endanger occupants during braking
or evasive maneuvers.<
Beverage holders
Front
Below the sliding covers.
When the vehicle is parked you can
rest cups, etc., on the closed sliding
covers.<
Rear
In the front of the rear seat cushion's
center.
Press briefly to open; slide back to close.
Ashtray, front
Opening
Slide back the cover by the recess.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
119
To extinguish a cigarette, tap off the ash
and gently press the tip into the funnel.
Emptying
Press the button, see arrow 1. The ashtray
rises for removal.
Cigarette lighter, front
Push down.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it
jumps back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter
by the knob only. Holding or touching
it in other areas could result in burns.
The cigarette lighter is also ready for oper-
ation when the remote control is unlocked.
For this reason, do not leave unsupervised
children in the vehicle.<
Lighter socket
The socket can be used to plug in hand
lamps, car vacuum cleaners, etc., with
power ratings of up to approx. 200 W at
12 V. Avoid damaging the socket due to
inserting plugs of different shapes or sizes.
With the ignition switched off, the
power supply to all electrical sockets
is cut off after approx. one hour.<
Power socket
An additional power socket is located in the
front passenger's footwell.
To gain access, fold the cover cap up.
Ashtray, rear
Emptying
Press the cover entirely down. The ashtray
rises for removal.
Cigarette lighter, rear
Refer to Cigarette lighter, front.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
120
Center armrest
Before folding down the armrest
adjust the head restraint to its lowest
position, refer to page 49.<
To open the storage compartment:
Press the button in the handle recess and
fold up the cover.
Comfort seat in rear
Before folding down the armrest
adjust the head restraint to its lowest
position, refer to page 49.<
To open the storage compartment:
Press the button and fold up the cover.
Ski bag*
Designed for safe, convenient transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2 snowboards.
The ski bag itself plus the additional
capacity provided by the luggage compart-
ment make it possible to transport skis with
a length of up to 6.9 ft (2.10 m). When skis
of 6.9 ft (2.10 m) in length are loaded the
ski bag will tend to contract, reducing its
overall capacity.
Loading
1. Lower the center armrest, open the
cover and place it on the armrest
2. Remove the cover panel
* and place it
on the controller in the rear
3. To open the hatch in the luggage com-
partment:
Press the handle and slide it to the right
4. Extend the ski bag between the front
seats. The zipper allows more conve-
nient access to stored objects and can
also be left open to allow the ski bag to
dry.
Please ensure that the skis are clean before
loading them into the bag. Take care to
avoid damage from sharp edges.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
121
Securing the load
Secure the bag's contents by tight-
ening down the strap at the buckle.<
Stowing the ski bag
1. To close the hatch in the luggage
compartment:
Press the handle and slide to the left
2. Fold up the ski bag and place it in the
compartment
3. Engage the cover as shown
4. Close the cover.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section is designed to
provide you with extra support by
supplying information useful in dealing with
specific driving and operating conditions.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
124
Things to remember when driving
Break-in procedures
To ensure that your vehicle continues to
furnish optimal economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we
request that you devote careful attention to
the following section.
Engine and differential
Up to 1,200 miles (2,000 km):
During this initial period you should attempt
to avoid constant, steady-state operation
and vary both vehicle and engine speeds
as often as possible. Until the break-in
period has been completed you should
also refrain from exceeding the following:
> 4,500 rpm or 105 mph (170 km/h)
Always obey all official speed limits.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode during
these initial miles.
Once you have driven 1,200 miles
(2,000 km), the engine and vehicle speeds
can be gradually increased.
You should also comply with these break-in
procedures should the engine or differen-
tial need to be replaced at a later point.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with
their manufacture, tires do not achieve their
full traction potential until after an initial
break-in period. Therefore, drive reservedly
during the first 200 miles (300 km).
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles (500 km) to achieve
optimal contact and wear patterns
between brake pads and rotors.
General driving notes
High temperatures
Extreme temperatures occur at the
catalytic converter on this and every
catalyst-equipped vehicle. Do not remove
the heat shields installed adjacent to
various sections of the exhaust system,
and never apply undercoating to them.
When driving, standing at idle and while
parking take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any
highly flammable materials such as hay,
leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead
to a fire, and with it the risk of serious pro-
perty damage as well as personal injury.<
Parking the vehicle
Condensation forms in the air conditioner
system during operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed
water under the vehicle are thus normal.
Before driving into the car wash
1. Fold in the door mirrors, refer to
page 52, as otherwise they could be
damaged due to the width of the vehicle
2. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock, as otherwise the P position of the
automatic transmission will automati-
cally be selected when the remote con-
trol is removed. Also refer to page 68
3. Release the parking brake, especially
when you have activated Automatic
Hold. Refer to pages 63 and 64.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a
wedge of water can form between tires and
road surface. This phenomenon is referred
to as hydroplaning, and is characterized by
a partial or complete loss of contact bet-
ween tires and road surface, ultimately
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
125
undermining your ability to steer and brake
the vehicle.<
Driving through water
Do not drive through water on the
road if it is deeper than 1 ft (30 cm),
and then only at walking speed at the most.
Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec-
trical systems and the transmission may be
damaged.<
Brake system
Braking with ABS
The best way to achieve optimal response
from the ABS is to apply maximum pres-
sure to the brake pedal during emergency–
panic stops. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can never-
theless avoid possible obstacles with a
minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation at the brake pedal combines with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits to indi-
cate to the driver that ABS is in its active
mode.
Do not drive with your foot resting on
the brake pedal. Even light but con-
sistent pedal pressure can lead to high
temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
Disc brakes
Driving in wet conditions
While driving in wet conditions and in
heavy rain, it is a good idea to apply light
pressure to the brake pedal every few
miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure
that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to
ensure that full braking efficiency will then
be available when you need it.
Hills
You can retain full and unimpaired braking
efficiency by downshifting to a gear in
which only minimal brake applications are
needed when descending long or steep
downhill stretches.
You can further enhance the engine's bra-
king effect by selecting a lower gear in the
automatic transmission's manual mode,
downshifting as far as first gear on extre-
mely steep stretches, refer to page 68. This
strategy helps you avoid placing excessive
loads on the brake system.
Never allow the vehicle to coast with
the transmission in Neutral – or with
the engine switched off – there is no engine
braking when the transmission is in Neu-
tral, and no power-assist for brakes and
steering when the engine is not running.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
accelerator and brake pedals and obstruct
their movement.<
Corrosion
When the vehicle is driven only occasio-
nally, during extended periods when the
vehicle is not used at all, and in operating
conditions where brake applications are
less frequent, there is an increased ten-
dency for corrosion to form on rotors, while
contaminants accumulate on the brake
pads. This occurs because the minimal
pressure which must be exerted by the
pads during brake applications to clean the
rotors is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors,
the brakes will tend to respond with a pul-
sating effect that even extended applica-
tion will fail to cure.
Brake pads
If the brake pad wear warning lamp
appears in the Check Control,
accompanied by a text: please take
careful note of the additional information in
the Control Display.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
126
Warning lamp for Canadian models.
The brake pads have reached their
minimum pad thickness. Have them
replaced at your BMW center as soon as
possible.
For your own safety: use only brake
pads that BMW has released for your
particular vehicle model. Because BMW
cannot assess the suitability of other brake
pads for use on your vehicle, we are unable
to assume continued responsibility for the
vehicle's operating safety if non-approved
pads are installed.<
Cargo loading
Stowing cargo
> Load heavy cargo as far forward and as
low as possible, placing it directly
behind the bulkhead behind the rear
seats
> Cover sharp edges and corners
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat
is not occupied, secure each safety belt
in the opposite buckle.
Securing the load
> Use the luggage net* or securing straps
to hold down small and light-weight
luggage and cargo, refer to page 40
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
* for securing
larger and heavier objects are available
at your BMW center. Anchorages for
attaching these heavy-duty straps have
been provided in your vehicle's luggage
compartment, refer to the illustration
> Please observe the special instructions
supplied with the anchorage fittings.
Always position and secure the load
correctly. If you do not, it can even
endanger the passengers during braking or
evasive maneuvers.
Never exceed either the approved gross
vehicle weight or either of the approved
axle loads, refer to page 210, as excessive
loads can pose a safety hazard, and may
also place you in violation of freeway safety
laws.
You should never transport heavy or hard
objects unsecured in the passenger com-
partment, as they could fly around and
even pose a safety hazard to the vehicle's
occupants during abrupt braking or evasive
maneuvers.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
127
Roof-mounted luggage
rack*
Anchorage points
The anchorage points are located within
the door openings.
A special rack system is available as an
option for your BMW. Please comply with
the precautions included with the installa-
tion instructions.
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's
center of gravity when loaded, they have a
major effect on its handling and steering
response.
You should therefore always remember not
to exceed the approved roof weight, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle
loads when loading the rack.
You can find the specified weights in the
Technical data section on page 210.
Make sure that the load is not too heavy,
and that it does not extend outward to
beyond the limits of the loading surface.
Always load the heaviest pieces first – on
the bottom. Be sure that adequate clea-
rance is maintained for raising the sliding/
tilt sunroof, and that objects do not project
into the opening path of the luggage com-
partment lid.
Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or being
lost during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Entry/pass tags
Infrared windshield technology has been
used on your vehicle to minimize solar
heating of the vehicle interior. This tech-
nology also reduces the ability of electronic
devices to transmit and receive through the
windshield, which will impair their perfor-
mance and operating range.
If you want to place an electronic toll col-
lection device or entry/pass tags behind
the windshield, please use the area marked
in the illustration. This area is clearly visible
from inside the vehicle.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Navigation
This section contains various examples
that illustrate how the navigation system
provides you with reliable guidance
to your destination.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Navigation
130
Navigation
GPS
Enter data only when the vehicle is
stationary, and always obey the traffic
regulations and road signs in the event of
any contradiction between traffic and road
conditions and the instructions issued by
the navigation system. If you do not
observe this precaution, you may be in vio-
lation of the law, and can endanger vehicle
occupants and other road users.<
GPS stands for Global Positioning System.
This integral component within your
vehicle's navigation system relies on refer-
ence satellites to determine the precise
location of your vehicle.
By allowing you to find your destination
without having to consult conventional
road maps as you drive, the navigation
system makes an important contribution to
traffic safety.
The result: the navigation system provides
you with dependable guidance to your des-
tination.
Map CD
Map CDs are inserted in the navigation
computer located behind the left-hand side
trim in the luggage compartment.
To ensure that your vehicle's navigation
system has access to the latest highway
network information, always load the most
recent CD version of the digital road map.
As is the case with conventional road
maps, the map CDs are subject to periodic
updates to ensure that they reflect the
latest information and surveys.
Map CDs are available at your BMW
center.<
Changing the map CD
As you drive, the computer will alert you
when you are leaving the area stored on
your current map CD; you should respond
by changing the map CD in the navigation
computer.
Map CDs contain road maps covering one
or more countries or regions.
To change the map CD:
1. Press the button
The CD is ejected from the navigation
computer
2. Take out the CD
3. Insert the new CD with the labeled side
up.
*
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
131
Allow approx. eight seconds for the
system to scan the data from the new
CD.
Starting the navigation
system
Select "Navigation".
A map will appear in the Control Display;
this usually shows the area around your
current position. This display will be contin-
ually updated as you drive.
When you park the vehicle before reaching
the entered destination, upon restarting
you will see the question "Continue route
guidance?" in the Control Display.
> When you enter "YES", the guidance
system resumes active operation and
the last selected screen content
appears in the Control Display
> When you enter "NO" the Control Dis-
play returns to the destination entry
mode.
Overview
Press the controller to view the menu.
In the map display mode and during
active guidance, all the menu items
will disappear after a few moments if no
further entries are made.<
Display in assistance
window*
You can also view the guidance system
display in the assistance window; it then
remains visible when you select a new
menu.
Select and confirm.
The following may now appear in the assis-
tance window:
> Map direction north
> Map in travel direction
> Arrow display.
The contents of the assistance window is
continually updated as you drive.
To deactivate display:
Select again and confirm.
Selection options
In entering your destination you can select
from among the following options:
> Manual entry of destination address,
refer to page 132
> To select town/city and street from the
directory, refer to page 134
> To select destination with map, refer to
page 134
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Navigation
132
> To select destination with "Informa-
tion", refer to page 135
> To select from among recent destina-
tions, refer to page 136
> To select destination from address
book, refer to page 140.
After selecting your destination you can
proceed to start the guidance system, refer
to page 137.
Destination entry
Enter data only when the vehicle is
stationary, and always obey the traffic
regulations and road signs in the event of
any contradiction between traffic and road
conditions and the instructions issued by
the navigation system. If you do not
observe this precaution, you may be in vio-
lation of the law, and can endanger vehicle
occupants and other road users.<
1. Press the controller
2. Select "Destinations" and confirm
3. Select "Dest. input" and confirm
These menu selections offer you various
options for entering your destination, as
described in the following section.
Manual entry of destination
address
The system relies on a wordmatch principle
to make it easier for you to enter the names
or towns or streets. It supports various
spellings as well as automatic name com-
pletion, refer to page 142.
You can enter the address of your destina-
tion with "ABC..."
> The "AS DEST." command can be used
to select the entered address as desti-
nation
> The "AS ADDRESS" command can be
used to store the entered address in the
address book.
You can store approx. 50 addresses and
then import them directly from your
address book to the navigation system as
travel destinations, refer to page 136.
Note the following special features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system
will guide you as far as the city limits
> Depending on the data stored on your
map CD, you may also be able to enter
the house or building number on some
streets
> You can skip the entry of country and
locality if the current entries are being
retained for your new destination
> You can overwrite street names if you
would like to proceed to another street
within the same locality.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
133
The example shows how to use the naviga-
tion system to find the following destina-
tion:
United States
Beverly Hills, Ca
455 N Rexford Drive
To enter the destination address:
Select "ABC..." and confirm.
Entering name
The name is not required for the destination
guidance system or storage in the list, how-
ever can simplify the assignment of
addresses.
1. Select "Name" and confirm
2. Turn to select the letters, then confirm
your selections by pressing.
Special characters:
Cancel selection process
Enter blank
Delete last letter
3. Select the name shown in the lower half
of the Control Display and confirm your
selection.
Selecting country of destination
When the name of a country appears in
white letters in the Control Display, this
indicates that data for more than one
country are stored on the map CD.
To select the United States as your country
of destination:
1. Select "Country" or the country named
in the display and confirm your selec-
tion. A list of available countries
appears in the display
2. Turn until "United States" is selected
3. Press to adopt your selection as your
destination.
Entering destination
"Town/City" or the name of the locality of
your last destination will now appear.
1. Select "Town/City" or the display town
name and confirm.
2. Turn until "B" is selected
3. Press to confirm your selection.
A directory listing localities starting with
the letter "B" appears in the lower half
of the Control Display. The list grows
smaller each time you enter a new
letter.
4. Enter "Beverly Hills" by selecting and
confirming the letters individually.
Special characters:
Cancel selection process
Enter blank
Delete last letter
5. Select name of locality from the direc-
tory and confirm your selection.
A town or city must be entered before
active guidance can start.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Navigation
134
Entering street, house number and
intersection
"Street" or the name of the last street
entered will appear.
For instructions on entry, refer to Entering
destination.
After entering the street you can proceed to
select the house number, for instance:
"455".
1. Turn until "4" is selected
2. Press to confirm your selection.
Use the same procedure to select all of
the remaining digits in the house
number.
Special characters:
Cancel selection process
Enter blank
Delete last character
3. Select the number that appears in the
lower half of the Control Display and
confirm your selection.
If the selected house number is
not stored on the map CD, the
system will adopt the nearest available
number.
The option for entering house numbers
will not be offered if no house numbers
are stored for the selected street on
your map CD.<
4. Address
> Select "AS DEST."
Active guidance to your destination can
start immediately
> Use "AS ADDRESS" to store in the
address book.
The procedure for entering intersections is
basically the same as that used for streets.
Selecting the town or city
and the street from the
directory
If you are uncertain about the precise name
of the city or town, or the street, the direc-
tory can assist you in entering this informa-
tion. It can show you all of the stored local-
ities in a given country or of the streets
listed for any particular town or city.
The directory appears as soon as you enter
the first letter of a locality or street. You
obtain a more selective listing the more let-
ters you enter.
Map-guided destination
selection
Assume that you only know the general
location of your destination's street or
locality. You also have the option of
selecting the destination on a map using a
target cursor and importing it into the des-
tination guidance system.
1. Select "With map" and confirm.
In the Control Display a map sec-
tion is displayed around the first
destination from the destination list,
even if the destination guidance system
is switched off.<
2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale
3. Push the controller in the desired direc-
tion to localize your destination.
If no further changes are made to the
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
135
map, after a brief pause the name of the
street or locality marked by the cursor
will appear on the screen.
4. Press the controller to view other menu
entries:
> closes "With map"
> "Next" switches back to "With map"
> "Location" selects the current loca-
tion as the map's focus again
> With "Save dest.", the address in the
target cursor can be adopted into the
destination input using "AS DEST." or
stored in the address book "AS
ADDRESS". If the navigation system is
unable to identify a street or town/city,
your current map coordinates will
appear. In order to be able to select this
position as destination or to store it in
the address book as an address, a
name must first be entered, see
"ABC...".
You can also use the destination
entry map without entering a town
or city if you wish to select a destination
and import it using the target cursor.<
Selecting destination in
"Information"
Assume that you are searching for a partic-
ular place within a town or city, such as a
hotel or restaurant, a filling station, the
nearest BMW center, tourist attractions, a
hospital.
1. Select "Information" and confirm
2. Select "On location" and confirm
3. Select the desired type of destination,
such as "Hotel / Motel" and confirm
your selection
4. A maximum of ten destinations now
appears on the right side of the Control
Display. These are listed by distance to
destination, while arrows also appear to
indicate their directions from your cur-
rent location
5. Select and confirm the destination
6. If you select
> the address, it will be transferred to
the destination list
> , the view can be shifted
upwards or downwards
> , you can switch back to "ABC...".
Using the voice command system:
Selecting interesting
destinations
Are you looking for an interesting destina-
tion in a specific locality or country? You
can obtain an overview from the map CD,
which contains listings of interesting desti-
nations in various categories.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Information location}
3. Enter the desired type of destina-
tion:
> {Hotels}
> {Parking}
> {Gas stations}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Navigation
136
1. Select "Information" and confirm
2. Select "On town/city" or "On country"
and confirm. A screen for entering the
town/city appears on the Control Dis-
play
3. Enter the desired town/city or country,
select "Next" and confirm
4. Select your destination category, such
as "Airport" and confirm your selection.
"ABC..." appears on the Control Display
screen along with an alphabetical listing
containing all entries in the selected
destination category. You can obtain a
more selective display of the informa-
tion contained in the directory by
entering one or more letters
5. Select the desired entry.
Using the voice command system:
Recent destinations
Returning to a recent destination
The system stores the last ten destinations
entered.
Select "Last dest." and confirm.
A list of the stored addresses appears on
the right side of the Control Display.
Confirm the desired destination and select
"AS DEST.". You can also edit existing
entries; for conditions refer to "ABC...".
> "AS ADDRESS" stores the destination
address in the address book
> "DELETE" removes the destination
address.
To delete all current entries:
Select and confirm.
Destination list
This is the most current listing of entered
destinations, with the most recent destina-
tions at the top of the list.
Once you have reached the top desti-
nation, you are moved on to the next
entry in the destination list.<
You can edit the entries in this list; start by
selecting an entry.
> Edit using "CHANGE"; for operation,
refer to "ABC...". In this case, the
entries are stored with "AS ADDRESS"
in the address book and with
"ACCEPT" adopted into the destination
list
1. {Navigation}
2. {Information destination}
3. Enter the desired type of destina-
tion:
> {Hotels}
> {Parking}
> {Gas stations}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
137
> Use "DELETE" to remove an entry
> Use to move the address in the
destination list. This can change the
order of the destination list.
To delete all current entries:
Select and confirm.
Selecting route
The navigation system also provides you
with the option of selecting a specific travel
route. You can define criteria for deter-
mining your individual route.
1. Select "Route selec." and confirm:
Various options are now listed on the
right side of the Control Display
2. Select the priorities for your travel route
and confirm.
> "With highway"
Freeways and major traffic arteries
receive top priority
> "Avoid highway"
Freeways are avoided where possible
> "Fastest route"
The system determines the fastest
route; the selection criteria are dis-
tance, vehicle speed and potential
sources of traffic congestion
> "Shortest route"
Shortest travel distance, determined
without including time as a selection
criterion
> "Avoid tolls"
The system avoids tollways whenever
possible in selecting the route.
You can change the selected route as often
as you like, both when entering your desti-
nation and at any time while the system is
guiding you to it – the system revises its
travel recommendations accordingly.
The navigation system relies on spe-
cific rules to determine your route.
These vary according to the different kinds
of roads stored on the map CD. As a result,
the routes recommended by the navigation
system may not always be the same ones
that you would choose based on personal
experience.<
Using the voice command system:
Starting the destination
guidance system
Select "Route guid." and confirm.
As the navigation computer determines the
route to your destination, the distance and
the true compass direction to your destina-
tion will appear at the upper right of the
Control Display – not in all display modes.
Once the system has determined your
travel route, the city or town of destination
will appear in the upper right corner of the
display. The destination guidance is carried
1. {Navigation}
2. {Route selection}
3. Enter the desired priority for your
travel route:
> {Via freeway}
> {Without freeway}
> {Fastest route}
> {Shortest route}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Navigation
138
out in dependence on the selected view,
refer to Displaying route.
The system also provides you with voice
instructions.
You will also be guided to your desti-
nation if you select a different menu,
e.g. "Entertainment" or "Climate". You will
be informed of a required change in direc-
tion in good time before each intersection
with voice instructions.<
Displaying route
The "View" menu allows you to view your
current travel route at various resolutions.
Selecting display of route map
You can also select a map showing your
travel route while the system is guiding you
to your destination.
1. Select "View" and confirm your selec-
tion. All the menu items will disappear
after a few moments if no further entries
are made
2. Select "Map facing N." and confirm
your selection.
During active guidance, the route
map will appear automatically when
you enter an area that is not completely
covered by your map CD.<
Changing scale
Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
The map scale is provided at the lower right
of the Control Display.
Altering display direction
At scales of less than 1.2 miles (2 km) you
enjoy the option of deciding whether to
orient the map to north or toward your cur-
rent direction of travel. From 1.2 miles
(2 km) the map always points toward North.
1. Select "View" and confirm your selec-
tion. All the menu items will disappear
after a few moments if no further entries
are made
2. Select "Map dir. travel" or "Map facing
N." and confirm.
Canceling route map
To switch to directional arrow mode:
1. Select "View" and confirm your selec-
tion. All the menu items will disappear
after a few moments if no further entries
are made
2. "Arrow display"
The destination guidance system is by
means of arrows in the Control Display
and in the Info Display, refer to page 14.
The arrow will follow the general
course when you travel through an
area for which your map CD does not pro-
vide comprehensive coverage. This feature
is intended to assist you at crossroads and
intersections.<
{Route guidance on}.
{Map}.
Shows the navigation system map.
1. {Scale}
2. Enter the desired map scale.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
139
Displaying route list
You can access a listing of streets and
towns on your route whenever the guid-
ance system is active. This list is based on
the navigation system's suggested travel
route.
The distances remaining to be traveled on
each individual road are also displayed.
1. Select "View" and confirm your selec-
tion. All the menu items will disappear
after a few moments if no further entries
are made
2. Select "Route" and confirm.
If the system has not yet completely
defined the travel route, "..." will appear
in the list.
Select and confirm to switch off the
route list.
The route list is displayed again after
a short time if no other menu item has
been selected.<
Selecting new route
During active guidance you can revise the
navigation system's route recommenda-
tions to avoid particular stretches of road.
Enter the number of miles/kilometers that
you want to travel before returning to the
original route.
Select "New route" and confirm your selec-
tion.
> "Avoid sect.":
The route list appears in the Control
Display. Select one or several con-
nected sections of the route that you
wish to avoid and confirm your
selection.
You can correct erroneous entries by
again selecting and confirming the
stretch of the travel route to cancel its
avoid status. You can also replace the
avoid section by marking another
stretch.
Use to exit from the route list and
calculate a new route
> "Avoid route":
You can also make a detour of up to
20 miles (30 km) around selected sec-
tions of the calculated route. Proceed
by turning the controller to enter the
desired detour mileage, then confirm
your selection. To exit the "Avoid route"
mode without modifying your route,
enter 0 miles (0 km) and confirm your
entry.
Bypass traffic congestion
If traffic congestion is present on your pro-
jected travel route, the navigation system
will issue a "Last exit" warning just before
you reach the back-up.
To obtain an alternative route leading
around the traffic congestion:
Select "Detour" and confirm.
The GPS navigation system determines a
new route and then returns to the destina-
tion guidance system.
The traffic information service might
not be available in some regions,
which means that a traffic jam cannot be
displayed.<
Voice guidance
To prevent the navigation system from
interrupting other audio sources, such as a
news program or traffic bulletin, you can
deactivate the voice guidance system.
Press the controller and select the desired
symbol during active destination guidance:
Activating and deactivating voice
guidance.
{Message on} or
{Message off}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Navigation
140
To repeat most recent instructions
with information on route or travel direc-
tion, when the voice guidance is activated.
Volume adjustment
You can adjust the volume for the naviga-
tion instructions:
Wait until the voice guidance is issuing
instructions, then turn the knob to select
the desired volume.
The navigation system's voice guidance
will continue to issue instructions at this
volume level, even if the other audio acces-
sories are set to minimum volume.
The system automatically selects
your individual volume setting each
time you unlock the vehicle using your per-
sonal remote control unit.<
Terminating/interrupting
active destination guidance
To terminate or interrupt the active destina-
tion guidance system:
Select "Route guid." and confirm.
The system suspends active guidance,
including voice guidance, until reactivated.
Address book
To make it even easier to enter destina-
tions, the system lets you store addresses
for frequent destinations.
You have the possibility to store the
addresses in two separate address books:
> the address book of the navigation
system
> the address book of the voice com-
mand system.
Navigation system address book
Storing addresses
In this address book, you can store
approx. 50 addresses.
Addresses can be entered from different
menus.
The system stores the current address in
the address book as "AS ADDRESS".
You can also enter your current posi-
tion in the address book after leaving
the sector covered by the map CD. In this
case, you must enter a name.<
Selecting an address
Select "Address book" and confirm.
A list of the stored addresses appears on
the right side of the Control Display.
To select an address as destination:
1. Select address and confirm
2. Select "AS DEST." and confirm.
You can also edit existing entries in the
address book; for operation refer to
"ABC...".
1. {Navigation}
2. {Route guidance off}.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Destination input navigation}
3. Select destination in the Control
Display.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
141
Home address
You can use to adopt your home
address into the destination input.
Select and confirm.
> "AS DEST." adopts the current
home address as destination
> You can enter and edit the home
address using the "ABC..." function
> "LOCATION" adopts the current loca-
tion as home address
> "AS ADDRESS" stores the entered
address or current location as your
home address.
To delete addresses
Select and confirm to delete all
existing entries.
Voice command system address
book
Storing addresses
The first destination in the destination list
can be stored in this address book:
It is always the case that only the first entry
in the destination list can be saved. To save
other addresses, change the destination
list accordingly, see page 136.
The house number is not stored in the
address book of the voice command
system.<
Selecting an address
Home address
To delete addresses
To delete individual entries:
To delete all current entries:
1. {Navigation}
2. {Save destination}
3. Enter a name to be assigned to the
destination's map coordinates.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Destination input with address}
3. {Select destination}
4. Enter destination
or
1. {Navigation}
2. {Read out address book}
> To scroll forward: {Next}
> To scroll back: {Back}
> To repeat: {Repeat}
> To import to destination list:
{Select}.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Route guidance to home}.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Delete}
3. Select name.
1. {Navigation}
2. {Delete address book}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Navigation
142
Location
Display of current location
1. Select "Location" and confirm.
You can request the current location of
your BMW or view a display showing your
map location. If the navigation system is
unable to identify a town or city, your cur-
rent map coordinates will appear.
If the navigation system recognizes the
city, but not the street and intersection, you
can enter these manually, refer to "ABC..."
for operating instructions. The entry is
adopted as the current location with
"ACCEPT".
"AS ADDRESS" can be used to import your
current location into the address book; you
can also enter a name as desired. Entry of a
name is mandatory for locations identified
only by their map coordinates.
Entering the location
We recommend that you avoid entering
subsequent corrections of your position
unless absolutely necessary. After trans-
port by truck or rail, etc., the GPS receiver
may require several minutes to determine
your current location. You can reduce the
amount of time the system requires to
determine your location by entering it man-
ually.
To enter your current location:
1. Select "Location" and confirm
2. Enter the address of the current loca-
tion in the same way as for destination
input, refer to page 132.
Once effective GPS reception has
been established, it will no longer be
possible to revise your position manually.<
Wordmatch principle
The system relies on a wordmatch principle
to make it easier for you to enter the names
of towns or streets. The system runs
ongoing checks, comparing your destina-
tion entries with the data stored on the map
CD as the basis for instant response. The
user benefits include:
> When you make an entry that consists
of more than one word, the system can
identify the name regardless of the
sequence in which you enter the indi-
vidual words.
Example:
Official version:
J.F. Kennedy Square
Possible entries:
Kennedy Square J.F.
or:
Square J.F. Kennedy
> Names of specific locations can also
vary from the official versions provided
that the spelling of the entry corre-
sponds to a standard form used in
another country
> When you are entering the names of
cities and streets the system will com-
plete them automatically as soon as
enough letters are available to ensure
unambiguous identification.
Example:
If you want to drive to Iowa Ave NW in
Washington, the system has already identi-
fied the street name when "o" is entered
and displayed it in the lower half of the
Control Display.
> The system only accepts name entries
beginning with letters that are stored on
the map CD. The system will not accept
non-existent names and addresses.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
143
What to do if …
What to do if …
> you request the current location of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise
display?
The system is unable to receive enough
GPS signals at your current location
owing to obstructions, your location is
not yet available on your CD, or the
system is in the process of calculating
your location. Please wait and then try
again later on
> the GPS logo disappears from the Con-
trol Display screen?
Reception is interrupted; a building or
similar obstruction may be the cause
> the guidance system refuses to import
an address from the destination direc-
tory as its destination?
The address is in the list, but not on the
map CD currently in use. Choose an
address as close as possible to the
original one, using the destination entry
map as required
> the guidance system does not adopt an
address without the street?
No specified center is defined for the
selected locality on your CD. Enter any
street, or a destination such as the
railway station, etc., then start the guid-
ance system
> you want to enter an address for the
guidance system, but it is not possible
to select the letters for your desired
entry?
The address is in the list, but not on the
map CD currently in use. In this case,
the system will not offer you any letters
to choose from. Choose an address as
close as possible to the original one,
using the destination entry map as
required
> the system stops furnishing directions
on which way to turn as you approach
intersections?
You are driving in an area that has not
yet been completely recorded on the
map CD. Instead of an arrow indicating
a turn, you will see an arrow which indi-
cates the general direction of your
planned route;
or
you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds
to calculate a new recommended route
> while the destination route map has
automatically been adopted for dis-
play?
You are driving in an area that has not
yet been recorded on the map CD. The
guidance system cannot operate under
these conditions. However, you will see
the current position of your BMW in the
map display to help you orient yourself
> the battery has been disconnected?
It will take approx. 15 minutes for the
system to resume operation.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Entertainment
This chapter is intended to assist you
in deriving maximum listening pleasure
from radio broadcasts, CDs,
cassettes or DVDs.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Entertainment
146
Entertainment
Controls
Operation using buttons
The illustration shows a CD player as an
example.
1 Operate audio and video sources
> Press: switching on/off
> Turn: adjusting volume
2 CD or cassette slot
3 Eject CD or cassette
4 Station scan/track search
> Station scan
> Tape fast-forward/reverse
> Music track search for CD and cas-
sette, chapter search for DVD changer.
Operation in Control Display
The following control options are available
in the "Entertainment" menu.
> "FM..." and "AM..."
Select waveband
> "WB"
Select Weather Band
> "Tape", "CD" and
Switch between audio sources
> "Memory"
Store a station
Tone settings
> "Video" and "Audio"
Switch to video or audio sources
> "TV" and "DVD"
Switch between video sources
> "Picture"
Adjust picture
Select standard
Select picture format
> "Tone"
Tone settings.
You can also control the radio, CD player,
CD changer cassette deck and the TV
using the buttons incorporated in the
steering wheel, refer to page 18, as well as
via the voice command system, refer to
page 26.
Care instructions
You can find everything you need to know
on this topic by consulting the separate
Care manual.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
147
Switching on/off
Press the knob.
The system returns to the most recently
selected audio or video source: radio, cas-
sette, CD, DVD or TV.
Using with ignition off
Switching the ignition off simultaneously
deactivates the sound system.
Switch on again as desired.
The audio and video functions remain
available for use for a period of approx.
20 minutes after you switch off the ignition.
To avoid discharging the battery you
should always switch off the sound
and video systems when leaving the
vehicle.<
Volume adjustment
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob to the desired volume level.
The sound system automatically
reverts to its mute mode automati-
cally whenever you use your portable
phone.<
The system automatically selects
your individual volume setting each
time you unlock the vehicle using your per-
sonal remote control unit.<
Tone control
Playing audio recordings
You can choose from the following tone
settings:
> Treble:
To amplify or reduce high frequencies
> Bass:
To amplify or reduce low frequencies
> Right/left balance adjustment –
Balance:
Left or right, high/low volume
> Front-to-rear adjustment – Fader:
Front or rear, high/low volume
> Default settings – RESET:
This feature resets the tone settings to
their standard default settings
> Speed-sensitive volume adjustment –
Speed Vol.
> Spatial sound effect Professional
LOGIC7
*
> Equalizer*.
The speakers and headphones can
be adjusted separately. The tone set-
tings of the headphones are made in the
rear screen with the headphones con-
nected. Only treble, bass and balance can
be adjusted.<
The system automatically selects
your individual tone setting each time
you unlock the vehicle using your personal
remote control unit.<
{Radio} or {Audio off}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Entertainment
148
Tone adjustment
1. Select "Memory" and confirm your
selection
2. Select "Tone" and confirm your selec-
tion
For the sound settings of the TV or
DVD you can directly select and con-
firm "Tone" for the video sources.<
3. Select desired tone settings
> "Treble" and "Bass"
Select "Treble" or "Bass". Press and
turn the controller to make the adjust-
ment
> "Balance" and "Fader"
Select "Balance" or "Fader". Press and
turn the controller to make the adjust-
ment
> "Speed Vol."
Raises volume as vehicle speed
increases. By pressing and turning the
controller, you can adjust the values
between 1- 6
> "LOGIC7"
*
Press and turn the controller to make
the adjustment.
You can set the spatial sound effect
between the values 0 and 10. The
optimum spatial sound lies at the values
5 and 6.
At 0, the spatial sound effect is
switched off. This setting is suitable
forradio plays, for example.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are
registered trade marks of Lexikon,
Inc., a company of the Harman Interna-
tional Group.<
> Equalizer
*
Select and confirm.
Turn the controller to select the desired
frequency range. Repeated pressing
and turning of the controller makes the
adjustment.
Resetting the tone settings
You can reset all tone settings except
"Speed Vol." to the standard default set-
tings.
Select "RESET" and confirm.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
149
Radio
Operating temperatures
Only operate the radio at tempera-
tures of 57 (–156) to 1407
(+606) otherwise, malfunctions can
occur.
Even when switched off, the device should
only be exposed to temperatures between
–137 (–256) and 1857 (+856).<
Starting
1. Switch on audio or video sources, refer
to page 147
If a video source is switched on,
select "Audio" and confirm.<
2. If another audio source is switched on,
select "FM..." or "AM..." and confirm.
Volume adjustment, refer to page 147.
Tone control, refer to page 147.
Stopping
Switch off audio or video sources, refer to
page 147
or switch over to
> CD player, refer to page 153
> CD changer, refer to page 155
> Cassette deck, refer to page 158
> TV, refer to page 160
> DVD, refer to page 162.
Selecting frequency band
Your radio provides reception of the FM
and AM wavebands.
To select waveband:
Select "FM..." or "AM..." and confirm.
Each time you confirm "AM..." the
system alternately switches between
the AM waveband and the "Autostore"
mode.
Each time you confirm "FM...", the system
alternately switches between "Memorized
Stations" and the "Autostore" mode.<
Displaying information
The current waveband selection appears in
the Control Display, for instance, in the FM
waveband:
> Memorized Stations
FM waveband
> 03
Number of memory location along with
broadcast frequency.
The frequency of the current station can be
seen in the lower status line of the Control
Display, refer to page 24.
{Radio}.
{Audio off}.
1. {Radio}
2. {FM} or {AM}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Radio
150
Selecting a station
Selecting station manually
To search for a particular station by
selecting its frequency
Scanning
To start scanning:
Extended pressure.
The scan mode begins with the currently
selected frequency.
The scan mode is stopped as soon as a
station is found.
The frequency of the station appears in the
bottom status line, refer to page 24.
Next station
Press to select the desired direction.
The next station that appears in the Control
Display is displayed.
Sampling and selecting – Scan
The automatic scan search feature auto-
matically plays a brief sample from each
station in the selected waveband.
1. Select "SCAN" in the Control Display
and confirm your selection.
Station search starts
2. To select a station:
Confirm "SCAN" a second time.
This cancels the scan function, and the
radio remains on the current station.
Storing and retrieving a
station
Memory locations
Your radio can store 36 stations:
> You can store as many as 18 stations in
the FM waveband
> You can store up to 18 stations in the
AM waveband.
Each time you confirm "AM..." the
system alternately switches between
the AM waveband and the "Autostore"
mode.
Each time you confirm "FM...", the system
alternately switches between "Memorized
Stations" and the "Autostore" mode.<
Storing a station
1. Select "Memory" and confirm your
selection
2. Select frequency band
"M FM" or "M AM"
Each time you confirm "M AM" the
system alternately switches between
the AM waveband and the "Autostore"
mode.
Each time you confirm "M FM...", the
system alternately switches between
"Memorized Stations" and the
"Autostore" mode.
3. To select a station:
> "SCAN"
The stations are played briefly one after
the other and selected by operating this
function once again
1. {Radio}
2. {Frequency 87 ..107 (Point 0 ..9)}.
1. {Radio}
2. {Next station} or {Station back}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
151
> "MANUAL"
The stations can be set manually by
turning the controller
4. To store a station:
Select "Memorize" and confirm your
selection
5. Select a memory location
Turn the controller to select a memory
location and confirm your entry.
The station is now stored.
The autostore utility's "AUTO" feature auto-
matically selects and stores the stations
providing the best reception in the
AM and FM wavebands.
Selecting a stored station
1. Select requency band
"FM..." or "AM..."
Each time you confirm "AM..." the
system alternately switches between
the AM waveband and the "Autostore"
mode.
Each time you confirm "FM...", the
system alternately switches between
"Memorized Stations" and the
"Autostore" mode
2. Turn and press the controller to select
stored stations.
Weather Band
Weather Radio is a service of the National
Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration –
NOAA – of the U.S. Department of Com-
merce. Weather messages are repeated
every four to six minutes and are routinely
revised every one to three hours, or more
frequently if needed. Most of the stations
operate 24 hours daily. During severe
weather, National Weather Service fore-
casters can interrupt the routine weather
broadcasts and substitute special warning
messages. If you have a question con-
cerning NOAA Weather Radio, please con-
tact your nearest National Weather Service
Office, or write to National Weather Service
– Attn: W/OM11 –, National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration, 1325 East-
West Highway, Silver Spring, MD. 20910.
1. {Radio}
2. {Station 1 ..12}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Radio
152
Selecting Weather Band
1. Select "WB" and confirm your selection
2. Select Weather Band station and con-
firm.
It might occur that the Weather Band
station is not available in some
regions.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
153
CD Compact Disc
To prevent CDs from being copied
illegally, they are often provided with
copy protection by the manufacturer.
Please observe the information on your CD.
These CDs differ from the CD Audio Stan-
dard Red Book, on the basis of which all
CD players and changers are designed.
Under certain circumstances this can pre-
vent or restrict the playing of CDs on your
CD player. In this case please contact the
CD dealer or manufacturer.<
If you play self-recorded audio CDs,
faults, e.g. drop-outs, can occur, or
the CD is not played at all.<
With self-recorded CDs, labels
applied later can become detached
during playback due to the development of
heat, causing irreparable damage to the
device.<
Operating temperatures
Only operate the CD-player at tem-
peratures of 57 (–156) to 1407
(+606) otherwise, malfunctions can
occur.
Even when switched off, the device should
only be exposed to temperatures between
–137 (–256) and 1857 (+856).<
Atmospheric humidity
High levels of humidity inside the player
can condense on the laser's scan lens and
prevent it from reading the CD.
Starting
Insert the CD in the slot.
If a CD is already inserted in the CD player:
Start playback
Select "CD" and confirm.
Volume adjustment, refer to page 147.
Tone control, refer to page 147.
Stopping
The CD emerges slightly from the CD
player
or
switch off audio or video sources, refer to
page 147
or switch over to
> Radio, refer to page 149
> CD changer, refer to page 155
> TV, refer to page 160
> DVD, refer to page 162.
*
1. {CD}
2. {CD on}.
.
1. {CD}
2. {Stop}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
CD Compact Disc
154
Searching for music tracks
in the Control Display
Selecting music track
Select music track and confirm your entry.
Sampling and selecting – Scan
The system plays a brief sample from each
CD track.
1. To start sampling:
Select "SCAN" and confirm
2. To select a track:
Confirm "SCAN" a second time to
cancel the scan function. Play resumes
at the point on the CD at which sam-
pling was interrupted.
Random play sequence – Random
The music tracks on the CD are played in a
random sequence, Random.
To start random play:
Select "RND" and confirm your selection.
To cancel random play:
Select any other function except track
search.
Using the buttons to search
for music tracks
Track search
Select the direction
Press repeatedly, continuing until you
reach the desired track.
The CD will start play at the title selected.
Fast forward/reverse
1. Select the direction
Press and hold the button. The tracks
can be heard, but the sound is distorted
2. To interrupt the fast forward/reverse
function, release the button.
The CD will start play at the point
selected.
1. {CD}
2. {Track 1 ..30}.
1. {CD}
2. {Next} or {Back}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
155
CD changer
Precautions when using laser
equipment
The BMW CD changer is a Class 1 laser
product.
Never remove the cover from the
housing. Do not operate the unit if the
cover is damaged. Operation without the
cover can lead to serious eye injury from
invisible laser beams.
Always refer all repair and maintenance
operations to qualified technicians.<
Copy protection
To prevent CDs from being copied
illegally, they are often provided with
copy protection by the manufacturer.
Please observe the information on your CD.
These CDs differ from the CD Audio Stan-
dard Red Book, on the basis of which all
CD players and changers are designed.
Under certain circumstances, this can pre-
vent or restrict the playing of CDs on your
CD changer. In this case, please contact
the CD dealer or manufacturer.<
Location
The BMW CD changer with a storage
capacity of 6 CDs is installed above the
glove compartment.
Removing the CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the CD mag-
azine you must first remove it from the CD
changer:
1. Press button 1; the lid 2 opens
2. The CD magazine is ejected and can be
removed.
Inserting/removing CDs from the CD
magazine
When inserting or removing CDs
always remember to grasp them on
the edge, taking care to avoid touching the
data side with its mirror finish.<
To insert:
Insert the CD in its slot with the label side
on top.
To remove:
Pull out the desired drawer and remove the
corresponding CD, as shown in the illustra-
tion.
With self-recorded CDs, labels
applied later can become detached
during playback due to the development of
heat, causing irreparable damage to the
device.<
*
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
CD changer
156
Inserting the CD magazine
1. Press button 1; the lid opens
2. Ensure that the arrow symbol is
pointing toward the CD player and slide
the magazine 2 all the way in. The lid
closes automatically.
The CD changer automatically reads
in the loaded CDs and is then ready
for operation.<
Operating temperatures
Only operate the CD changer at tem-
peratures of 57 (–156) to 1407
(+606); otherwise, malfunctions can
occur.
Even when switched off, the device should
only be exposed to temperatures between
–137 (–256) and 1857 (+856).<
Atmospheric humidity
High levels of humidity inside the player
can condense on the laser's scan lens and
prevent it from reading the CD.
Starting
1. Insert the CD magazine
2. Select and confirm.
After a few seconds, play will resume at the
point where the CD stopped earlier.
If the CD magazine has been newly
filled, playback begins with the lowest
CD, e.g. CD 1, track 1.<
Volume adjustment, refer to page 147.
Tone control, refer to page 147.
If you play self-recorded audio CDs,
faults, e.g. drop-outs, can occur, or
the CD is not played at all.<
Stopping
Switch off audio or video sources, refer to
page 147
or switch over to
> Radio, refer to page 149
> CD player, refer to page 153
> Cassette deck, refer to page 158
> TV, refer to page 160
> DVD, refer to page 162.
Status displays
The CD magazine's load status is indicated
in the Control Display.
If the display fails to detect a CD that
you have loaded in the magazine,
check to ensure that the CD has been
inserted correctly and inspect it for signs of
defects.<
1. {CD changer}
2. {CD on}.
1. {CD changer}
2. {Stop}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
157
Searching for music tracks
in the Control Display
Selecting CD
Select CD and confirm.
Playback starts on the first track. At the end
of the last track, the next CD will be
selected.
Sampling and selecting – Scan
The system automatically plays a brief
sample from each of the tracks on the cur-
rent CD.
1. To start sampling:
Select "SCAN" and confirm.
The Scan function starts with the next
track. Once all tracks have been played
once, the next track is played
2. To select a track:
Confirm "SCAN" a second time to
cancel the scan function. Play resumes
at the point on the CD at which sam-
pling was interrupted.
Random play sequence – Random
In this mode the music tracks on the
current CD are played in a random
sequence, Random.
To start random play:
Select "RND" and confirm your selection.
To cancel random play:
Select any other function except track
search.
Using the buttons to search
for music tracks
Track search
Select the direction
Press repeatedly, continuing until you
reach the desired track on the current CD.
The CD will start play at the title selected.
Fast forward/reverse
1. Select the direction
Press and hold the button. The tracks
can be heard, but the sound is distorted
2. To interrupt the fast forward/reverse
function, release the button.
The system will continue play at the
point on the CD at which the button was
released.
Selecting music track
{CD 1 ..6}.
1. {CD changer}
2. {Next} or {Back}.
1. {CD changer}
2. {Track 1 ..30}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Cassette
158
Cassette
Operating temperatures
Only operate the cassette deck at
temperatures of 57 (–156) to
1407 (+606); otherwise, malfunctions
can occur.
Even when switched off, the device should
only be exposed to temperatures between
–137 (–256) and 1857 (+856).<
Starting
Slide the cassette all the way into the slot,
ensuring that the side with the exposed
tape is on the right.
If a cassette is already in the slot:
Start playback
Select "Tape" and confirm.
Volume adjustment, refer to page 147.
Tone control, refer to page 147.
Stopping
The cassette emerges from the slot
or
switch off audio or video sources, refer to
page 147
or switch over to
> Radio, refer to page 149
> CD changer, refer to page 155
> TV, refer to page 160
> DVD, refer to page 162.
Selecting side A or B
Select "Side" and confirm.
Switching "Booktape" on/
off
Select "Booktape" and confirm.
Each time you confirm "Booktape", the
deck alternately switches between the two
booktape tracks and the standard stereo
sound track.
The selected booktape track is indicated as
"Booktape 1" or "Booktape 2".
When you change tape sides with the
"Side" command the deck reverts to
playing the standard stereo tape.
Noise suppression
Dolby B or C are systems designed to sup-
press noise and hiss during playback of
audio cassettes.
It amplifies high frequencies during
recording, and reduces their intensity
during playback. Because background
noise consists primarily of high frequencies
generated during play, this strategy results
in lower levels of background noise.
Dolby and the symbol are registered
trademarks of the Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
*
{Tape on}.
1. {Tape}
2. {Stop}.
1. {Tape}
2. {Reverse}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
159
Switching Dolby on/off
Activate only when playing cassettes
that were recorded with Dolby B or
Dolby C, as the quality of sound reproduc-
tion will otherwise suffer from a loss of
high-frequency response.<
1. Select "Tape" and confirm
2. Select "Dolby..." and continue pressing
until you obtain the best sound quality.
The system switches between Dolby B
and Dolby C or switches off the Dolby
function.
The selected noise-suppression mode is
indicated as "Dolby B" or "Dolby C".
Searching for music tracks
Fast forward/reverse
Select the direction
Press twice briefly or once for a longer
period.
When it reaches the end of the tape, the
player automatically switches to the other
side.
To interrupt the fast forward function
Music search
For the music search feature to
operate, there must be pauses of at
least 4 seconds between the individual
music selections.<
Switch on the music search feature
The tape is wound forward or back to the
next music selection, and switches to the
other side when it reaches the end of the
current side.
To interrupt the fast forward function
1. {Tape}
2. {Next} or {Back}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
TV
160
TV
For your own safety, the TV picture is only
shown on the rear screen.
Due to the quality of mobile reception,
reduced picture quality can result
depending on the location and network
coverage in spite of the highly advanced
reception technology used. A change in
vehicle locations can result in improved
reception quality in many cases.<
Starting
1. Switch on audio or video sources, refer
to page 147
If an audio source is switched on,
select "Video" and confirm.<
2. Select "TV" and confirm your selection.
The device selects the last station set.
Volume adjustment, refer to page 147.
Tone control, refer to page 147.
All menu items will disappear from the
screen after a brief pause if you do
not make any additional entries.<
Stopping
Switch off audio or video sources, refer to
page 147
or switch over to
> Radio, refer to page 149
> CD player, refer to page 153
> CD changer, refer to page 155
> Cassette deck, refer to page 158
> DVD, refer to page 162
or
change to another menu.
Storing programs
The stations with the strongest reception
are automatically stored and continuously
adjusted to the respective reception situa-
tion.
Selecting programs
1. Press controller to view the programs
2. Select program and confirm
or
select the direction
Press repeatedly, continuing until you
reach the desired program.
*
{TV on}.
1. {TV}
2. {Off}.
1. {TV}
2. {Next} or {Back}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
161
Adjusting the picture*
During reception, the menu items are
displayed by pressing the con-
troller.<
1. Select "TV" and confirm your selection
2. Select "Picture" and confirm.
Additional menu items are displayed on
the right-hand side.
Selecting brightness, color, contrast
and tint
Select "Brightness", "Color", "Contrast" or
"Tint". Press and turn the controller to
make the adjustment.
Selecting standard
Television stations can be received world-
wide with the multi-standard receiver for
PAL, SECAM, NTSC.
The TV standard used is not the same in all
countries. However, you can change over
your TV receiver to all common TV stan-
dards.
During reception the menu items are
displayed by pressing the con-
troller.<
1. Select "TV" and confirm your selection
2. Select "Picture" and confirm
3. Select "TV format" and confirm your
selection
4. Select the country you are currently in
from the list displayed and confirm.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
DVD changer
162
DVD changer
Precautions when using laser
equipment
The BMW DVD changer is a Class 1 laser
product.
Never remove the cover from the
housing. Do not operate the unit if the
cover is damaged. Operation without the
cover can lead to serious eye injury from
invisible laser beams.
Always refer all repair and maintenance
operations to qualified technicians.<
Copy protection
Macrovision copy protection:
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is protected by
method claims of certain U.S. patents and
other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights
owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovi-
sion Corporation, and is intended for home
and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Cor-
poration. Reverse engineering or disas-
sembly is prohibited.<
To prevent CDs from being copied
illegally, they are often provided with
copy protection by the manufacturer.
Please observe the information on your CD.
These CDs differ from the CD Audio Stan-
dard Red Book, on the basis of which all
CD players, changers and your BMW DVD
changer are designed. Under certain cir-
cumstances this can prevent or restrict the
playing of CDs on the DVD changer. In this
case please contact the CD dealer or man-
ufacturer.<
Supported media formats
The DVD changer can play the following
formats:
> Video DVD
> CD-DA – Audio CD
> CD-R.
The DVD Audio format is not sup-
ported by the DVD changer. However,
many audio DVDs available in stores also
contain a video track in the DVD Video
format in addition to the audio track. These
DVDs can be played back by the DVD
changer. Please see the information on
your DVD to determine whether your audio
DVD contains an additional video track.<
DVDs are usually divided into tracks
and chapters and can contain dif-
ferent subtitles, camera angles or sound
tracks, languages and sound formats.
Depending on the version of the DVD,
these functions can be selected either
directly with the DVD control system or only
via the DVD-specific menu. See the infor-
mation on your DVD for possible selec-
tions.<
Location
The BMW DVD changer for 6 DVDs or
audio CDs is mounted behind the left-hand
side trim panel in the luggage compart-
ment.
*
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
163
Removing the DVD magazine
To insert or remove DVDs or CDs from the
storage magazine, you must first remove it
from the DVD changer:
1. Push the door to the right, see arrow 1
2. Press the button, see arrow 2.
The magazine is ejected and can be
removed.
Inserting/removing CDs/DVDs from
the DVD magazine
When inserting or removing DVDs/
CDs, always remember to grasp them
on the edge, taking care to avoid touching
the data side with its mirror finish.<
To insert:
Insert the DVD or CD in its slot with the
label side on top.
To remove:
Pull out the desired drawer and remove the
corresponding DVD or CD, as shown in the
illustration.
With self-recorded CDs, labels
applied later can become detached
during playback due to the development of
heat, causing irreparable damage to the
device.<
Dual-sided DVDs available from retail
suppliers are coated on both sides
and bear no markings. This means both
sides are information carriers. To play back
the information on the other side, remove
the magazine and turn over the DVD.<
If you play self-recorded audio
CD-Rs, faults, e.g. drop-outs, can
occur.<
Inserting the DVD magazine
1. Push the door to the right
2. Ensure that the arrow symbol is
pointing toward the DVD changer and
slide the magazine all the way in
3. Close the door again.
The DVD changer checks the maga-
zine for inserted DVDs or CDs and is
then ready for operation.<
Operating temperatures
Only operate the DVD changer at
temperatures of 57 (–156) to
1407 (+606); otherwise, malfunctions
can occur.
Even when switched off, the device should
only be exposed to temperatures between
–137 (–256) and 1857 (+856).<
Atmospheric humidity
High levels of humidity inside the player
can condense on the laser's scan lens and
prevent it from reading the DVD.
DVD country codes
Your DVD changers only plays DVDs with
the coding 0 or 1. This coding cannot be
changed.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
DVD changer
164
Care instructions
You can find everything you need to know
on this topic by consulting the separate
Care manual.
Starting
Make all entries with the vehicle sta-
tionary. If you do not observe this pre-
caution, you may endanger vehicle occu-
pants and other road users.<
1. Inserting the DVD magazine
2. Select "DVD" and confirm.
After a few seconds, play will resume at the
point where the CD stopped earlier.
If the DVD magazine has been newly
filled or an audio CD played from the
DVD magazine, playback begins with the
lowest DVD in the DVD magazine.<
Volume adjustment, refer to page 147.
Tone control, refer to page 147.
If you play self-recorded audio CDs,
faults, e.g. drop-outs, can occur, or
the CD is not played at all.<
Stopping
1. Press the controller
2. Select and confirm.
3. Switch over to
> Radio, refer to page 149
> CD player, refer to page 153
> CD changer, refer to page 155
> Cassette deck, refer to page 158
> TV, refer to page 160
or
change to another menu.
Status displays
The DVD magazine's load status is indi-
cated in the Control Display.
If the display fails to detect a DVD that
you have loaded in the magazine,
check to ensure that the DVD has been
inserted correctly and inspect it for signs of
defects.
If there are audio CDs in the DVD maga-
zine, these will not be displayed in the DVD
menu, but instead in the CD changer menu.
If your vehicle is equipped with an addi-
tional CD changer, they will be displayed
with the numbers 7 to 12.<
DVD control
With the DVD controller you can select the
track and chapter, display the DVD-specific
menu and operate functions such as Lan-
guage, Fast Forward and Reverse or
Freezing Frame.
A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of
the DVD control, under certain circum-
stances while the entire DVD is being
played. You are then unable to operate the
DVD control. In this case, attempt to make
the selection using the DVD-specific menu.
Display DVD controller:
1. Select "DVD" and confirm
2. Wait briefly until all menu items have
disappeared, then press controller.
{DVD on}.
1. {DVD}
2. {Off}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
165
The DVD controller disappears again after
a short time if you have not selected a func-
tion.
During playback the DVD controller is
displayed by pressing the con-
troller.<
Selecting a track
Several tracks can be stored on a DVD.
1. Select DVD and confirm your entry.
Playback begins after a few seconds.
2. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 164
3. Select "FULL MENU" and confirm
4. Select "TITLE" and confirm
5. Turn and press the controller to select
the desired track.
Playback begins at the track selected.
Fast forward/reverse
1. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 164
2. Select the direction
and confirm.
3. To increase the fast forward/reverse
speed, press the controller several
times.
The DVD playback will be distorted
4. End fast forward/reverse:
Select and confirm.
The DVD will start play at the point
selected.
When the DVD is playing, rapid fast
forward/reverse is started by turning
the controller. The speed can be increased
by turning the controller further. To inter-
rupt the fast forward/reverse function,
release the controller. The system will con-
tinue play at the point on the DVD at which
the controller button was released.<
Softkey Function
Start playback
Stop playback
Close DVD controller
Activate and deactivate
freezing frame
Chapter search
Fast forward/reverse
DVD-specific menu:
Select functions
DVD-specific menu:
Return to previous menu
{DVD 1 ..6}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
DVD changer
166
Chapter search
You can change to the next or pre-
vious chapter during playback.<
1. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 164
2. Select the direction
Confirm repeatedly, continuing until
you reach the desired chapter
or with buttons
select the direction
Press repeatedly, continuing until you
reach the desired chapter on the current
DVD.
Playback begins at the chapter selected.
Adjusting picture
1. During playback, press controller
2. Select and confirm.
3. Adjusting the picture, refer to page 161.
Freezing frame
1. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 164
2. At the desired position,
select and confirm.
The film is stopped
3. To restart the DVD:
Select or and confirm.
DVD playback is continued at the point
at which it was interrupted.
Selecting picture format
You can adjust the DVD format to your
screen.
1. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 164
2. Select and confirm
3. Select and confirm
4. Select "Picture" and confirm
5. Select "Pict. format" and confirm your
selection
6. Select the desired picture format and
confirm.
The picture format is a DVD-specific
function and is not offered by all
DVDs.<
Selecting language,
subtitles and viewing angle
Many DVDs offer dialogs and subtitles in
various languages or scene descriptions
for the hearing impaired. In addition, with
some DVDs the film can be viewed from
different camera angles. These functions
are stored on the DVD.
To select functions:
1. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 164
2. Select "FULL MENU" and confirm.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
167
> Select "AUDIO" and confirm
You can select from the various lan-
guages by turning and pressing the
controller
> Select "SUBTITLE" and confirm
You can display the subtitles in the lan-
guage of your choice by turning and
pressing the controller
> Select "ANGLE" and confirm
You can change the camera angle by
turning and pressing the controller.
Notes or symbols that appear during
the playback of a film generally point
out different camera angles. These are
usually only briefly available.
With some DVDs the language, subti-
tles or camera angle is only possible
with the DVD-specific menu.
See the information on your DVD for pos-
sible selections.<
Opening DVD-specific
menu
Additional functions may be available on
DVDs. For example, the viewer can select
from several possible plots or display infor-
mation on the film.
1. Display DVD controller, refer to
page 164
2. Select "MENU" or "TOP" and confirm.
With "MENU" you can generally
open the DVD-specific main
menu. On some DVDs you will find an
additional menu called "TOP" in which,
for example, you can select music
scenes.<
To make a selection:
1. Use to select a function
2. Confirm selection with "OK".
To return to a previous menu:
Select or and confirm.
Language, subtitle or angle can also
be selected in the DVD-specific
menu.
See the information on your DVD for pos-
sible selections.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter describes the extensive
array of options available for mobile
communications with family,
friends, business associates
and service providers.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Using the phone in your vehicle
170
Using the phone in your vehicle
Safety notice
For your own safety
Your in-car phone makes life more conve-
nient in many ways, and can even save
lives in an emergency. While you should
consult your portable phone's separate
manual for a detailed description of safety
precautions and information, we request
that you direct your particular attention to
the following:
Adjustments
To avoid posing a danger to yourself
and other road users, never adjust the
system settings unless your vehicle is com-
pletely stationary.<
Using the phone in your vehicle
Using a hand-held portable phone to
make and receive calls while driving is
now illegal in virtually every country in the
world. Always use your hands-free system,
or stop your vehicle in an area where you
will not pose a safety hazard to other road
users.<
Vehicles and portable phones
Do not use your phone from within a
garage, or near an open hood. The air
in these areas could contain fuel vapors,
and the portable phone might generate
sparks that could result in burns.
This same precaution applies to open
luggage compartment lids on vehicles
equipped for operation using natural gas or
hydrogen, and to all vehicles with luggage
compartment-mounted batteries.<
Antenna
When using the phone, ensure that all
persons in the area are at least 20 in
(50 cm) from the antenna. Never use your
BMW portable phone if the antenna is dam-
aged. Contact between your skin and a
damaged antenna can result in minor
burns.
If the antenna is damaged, have it replaced
immediately.<
Special environmental conditions
Always switch off your BMW portable
phone in areas where blasting work is
being conducted with explosives. The
phone signals could potentially act as a
high-frequency transmitter and set off
explosions.
Always switch off your BMW portable
phone in areas where an increased explo-
sion danger is present. This category
includes filling stations along with fuel and
chemical storage depots, etc., and all
areas in which the air can contain fuel,
chemicals or metal particles. Under these
conditions, your BMW portable phone
could conceivably generate sparks that
could lead to a fire or explosion. Always
observe all legal regulations governing the
use of portable phones in the vicinity of
filling stations, chemical factories and other
areas where an explosion potential exists.
Never use the BMW portable phone in air-
craft; do not use this portable phone in hos-
pitals, care centers or at other locations
where medical equipment may be in oper-
ation, such as accident sites, etc.
Your service provider can furnish you with
more detailed information on legal regula-
tions governing the use of your phone.<
Medical equipment
Portable phones can generate inter-
ference capable of preventing hearing
aids and cardiac pacemakers from oper-
ating correctly. If you or any occupant of
the vehicle will be using such equipment,
consult a physician or the manufacturer
of the equipment to determine whether
it is adequately shielded against high-
frequency energy.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
171
Batteries
Never attempt to open your BMW
portable phone or its battery. Use
only approved battery types – the wrong
battery can destroy your portable phone.
To avoid possible short circuits, after
removing a battery you should never allow
it to come into contact with metallic sur-
faces of any kind.<
Disposing of used batteries
Return used batteries to a recycling
collection point or to your BMW
center.<
Care instructions
You can find useful information on caring
for your portable phone in the separate
Portable phone manual and in the separate
Care manual.
Controls
You have the option of making phone calls
with the car phone or the BMW portable
phone.
If there is no BMW portable phone in the
cradle, Personal calling can be made with
the car phone.
Your car phone must be activated to
support his feature. Please see your
BMW center for further instructions to acti-
vate your car phone with the wireless car-
rier.<
The upper status line will indicate which
phone is currently active and connected to
the network.
For information on operating your
portable phone, please consult the
separate manual.<
The portable phone can be operated by
means of
> controls on the steering wheel, refer to
page 18
> Control Display
> the folding telephone keypad
> and the voice command system, not for
incoming calls.
Control Display
In the "Communication" menu
> the telephone book, only with BMW
portable phone
> the Top 8 list, only with BMW portable
phone
> the redial list
can be called up.
After selection of the desired entry,
> the button in the steering wheel
> the folding telephone keypad
can be used to set up a connection; the
dialed number appears in the upper status
line, refer to page 24.
Missed calls are also shown in a list if this
service is supported by your network pro-
vider.
You can use and to switch
between the two pages of the "Communi-
cation" menu.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Using the phone in your vehicle
172
Telephone keypad, folding
The telephone keypad allows you to use all
of the basic telephone functions without
ever picking up the receiver.
Calls are automatically routed through the
hands-free system.
The telephone keypad is available for
operation at the radio mode in the
ignition lock, refer to page 61.<
1 Briefly press the telephone keypad, it
will extend automatically
When you are done using the tele-
phone keypad, press it back in, con-
tinuing until the detent engages.
It is not possible to remove the
telephone keypad.<
2 Short press: end call
Long press: switch BMW por-
table phone on and off
3 Short press: delete the last
digit entered
Long press: delete the entire
number
4 Short press: dial or accept call
5 Enter digits 1– 9
6 Special character entry
7 Enter the digit 0
8 Short press: special character
entry
Long press: pause for dialing in
the DTMF mode
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
173
Hands-free system
The hands-free microphone is located on
the front headliner.
The hands-free system is automatically
activated whenever you establish or
receive a call using the following:
> Button in the steering wheel
> Control Display
> Telephone keypad, folding
> Voice command system, only for out-
going calls.
Volume adjustment
You can adjust the volume for the hands-
free unit:
Turn the button during a call to select the
desired volume.
The hands-free unit will remain at this
volume level, even if the other audio
sources are set to minimum volume.
The system automatically selects
your individual volume setting each
time you unlock the vehicle using your per-
sonal remote control unit.<
Making an SOS call
1. To open the protective cover:
Press the protective cover, to reveal the
SOS button.
2. Press the SOS button for at least
1 second.
Conditions for an SOS call:
> The wireless communications network
is available
> The SOS call system is operable.
Once the button is pressed, the indicator
lamp on the switch will flash for the dura-
tion of the call.
If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system and BMW Assist, the phone system
will automatically establish contact with the
BMW Assist emergency call center. The
system also transmits the vehicle's current
location to the center at the same time.
If the navigation system fails, the cur-
rent position of the vehicle is not
transmitted.<
Following transmission of the data a confir-
mation report will appear in the Control
Display. The emergency call center can
initiate immediate action for emergency
assistance.
If it is repeatedly not possible to set up a
connection to the BMW Assist emergency
call center, a connection to the general
emergency call number 911 is set up.
If conditions allow, remain in the
vehicle until the connection has been
established. You will then be able to pro-
vide a detailed description of the situation.
Misuse of the SOS system is prohibited.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Using the phone in your vehicle
174
Under certain conditions, an SOS call is
triggered automatically immediately after a
severe accident. The automatic SOS call is
not affected by the SOS call button being
pressed.
Telephoning with the
car phone
If the BMW portable phone is not in the
cradle, you can telephone using the car
phone via the hands-free unit.
The telephone that can be used to set up a
connection is shown in the upper status
line in the Control Display.
The car phone must be enabled prior
to initial use. To do so, please consult
your BMW center.<
Calls can be set up or accepted using the
following equipment:
> Button in the steering wheel
> Control Display
Calls can only be set up via redi-
aling or missed calls.<
> Telephone keypad, folding
> Voice command system, only for out-
going calls.
Using the BMW portable
phone
1. Fold back the cradle slightly
2. Insert the portable phone.
Before starting off, place the BMW
portable phone in the cradle. You can
operate the portable phone using the
button in the steering wheel, the Control
Display, the telephone keypad or the voice
command system, but not if you are in the
middle of a call via the car phone.
If you are in the middle of a call using the
BMW portable phone, the connection will
be cut off as soon as you take it from the
cradle.<
Switching your BMW portable phone
on and off
You can switch your BMW portable
phone on and off by maintaining
extended pressure on the telephone
keypad.
Entering lock code
If, after switching on the BMW portable
phone, you are requested by a message
from the Control Display to enter the lock
code:
1. Enter the lock code, e.g. 1234
2. Press the button
Getting started
Making a call
1. Enter the desired phone number
2. Press the button
The phone number appears in the Control
Display's status line.
{Telephone on}.
1. {Dial number}
2. Enter the phone number
> Listen to the entered numerical
sequence:
{Read out}
> Delete the entire number:
{Delete}
3. {Dial}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
175
Always remember to enter the com-
plete telephone number, including the
area code, even if you are currently in the
same area as the number that you wish to
contact.<
Ending call
Press the button
Telephone directory
You must enter your portable phone's tele-
phone directory in the voice command
system before it will be available for access
using voice commands. This creates a spe-
cial voice command telephone directory. If
changes are then made to the directory
using the voice command system, these
modifications will apply exclusively to the
voice directory, and not to the directory in
the portable phone.
Creating and updating voice
command telephone directory*
The entries in the portable phone's tele-
phone directory appear sequentially in the
Info Display.
You must assign a specific name to each
number that you wish to transfer to the
voice command telephone directory. These
numbers will no longer be requested during
updates.
Making a new entry in the voice
command directory
Dialing from telephone directory
1. Select "Communication"
> Select "A-Z"
An alphabetical listing of all the entries
in the telephone book appears on the
right side of the Control Display
> Select "1,2,3"
An listing of all the entries in the tele-
phone book appears on the right side of
the Control Display
2. After the desired entry has been
selected, can be used to set up a
connection; the number being called
appears in the upper status line, refer to
page 24.
The system dials the number.
The connection can also be set up
using the button in the steering wheel
or the telephone keypad. <
End call.
1. {Telephone}
2. {Update telephone book}.
1. {Save name}
2. Enter name and repeat entry upon
request
3. Enter phone numbers
4. {Save}.
1. {Select name}
2. Enter name.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Using the phone in your vehicle
176
Viewing entries
Deleting individual entries
Deleting the entire telephone
directory
Selecting a number from
the Top 8 list
The eight numbers that you call most fre-
quently on the BMW portable phone are
automatically stored in the Top 8 list. The
number called most often appears at the
top of the list.
1. In the "Communication" menu, select
"TOP 8" and confirm
2. Select an entry from the list that now
appears in the display, and confirm
3. After the desired entry has been
selected, can be used to set up a
connection; the number being called
appears in the upper status line, refer to
page 24.
The connection can also be set up
using the button in the steering wheel
or the telephone keypad.<
End call.
Redialing
Both numbers that you reached on your
earlier attempt and numbers that were
unavailable are automatically stored in your
redialing list. The last number dialed is at
the top of the list.
1. Select "Communication"
2. Select "Last"
3. Select an entry from the list that now
appears in the display, and confirm
4. After the desired entry has been
selected, can be used to set up a
connection; the number being called
appears in the upper status line, refer to
page 24.
The connection can also be set up
using the button in the steering wheel
or the telephone keypad.<
You can use the voice command system to
redial the last number called:
End call.
Missed calls
If the phone number of the caller was trans-
ferred, you can have a list of all missed calls
displayed if this service is supported by
your network provider.
{Read out}
> To scroll forward:
{Next}
> To scroll back:
{Previous}
> To repeat entry:
{Repeat}
> To call:
{Dial}.
1. {Telephone}
2. {Delete entry}
3. Enter name.
1. {Telephone}
2. {Delete telephone book}.
{Redial}.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
177
1. Select "Communication"
2. Select "Missed" and confirm
3. Select an entry from the list that now
appears in the display, and confirm
4. After the desired entry has been
selected, can be used to set up a
connection; the number being called
appears in the upper status line, refer to
page 24.
The connection can also be set up
using the button in the steering wheel
or the telephone keypad.<
End call.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
BMW Assist
178
BMW Assist
To avoid posing an unnecessary
hazard, both to your own vehicle's
occupants and to other road users: never
attempt to use the controls or make adjust-
ments while operating the vehicle.<
Requirements
If the following requirements are met, you
can call up BMW Assist:
> Telephone is connected and switched
on
> The lock code has been entered
> The mobile communications network is
available
> GPS reception is assured.
The position of the vehicle can influ-
ence the mobile communications/
GPS reception. As a rule, mobile communi-
cations/GPS reception is only possible
under a clear sky.
When vehicle data is exchanged with the
BMW Service Center, a corresponding
message appears in the Control Display.<
Roadside Assistance of the
BMW Group
Here, you automatically dial the number of
the Roadside Assistance of the BMW
Group, your BMW center or BMW Cus-
tomer Relations.
To contact Roadside Assistance, for
example in the event of a breakdown:
1. Select "BMW Assist" and confirm
2. Select "BMW Services" and confirm
3. Select "Roadside Assistance" and con-
firm.
The vehicle's current location is dis-
played
4. Select "ACTIVATE" and confirm.
The data of your vehicle is transmitted
to BMW center.
BMW center forwards the current vehicle
location and the customer profile, the
vehicle data, to the relevant Roadside
Assistance service. Voice communication
to the Roadside Assistance service is set
up.
*
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
179
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and
lubricants, wheels and tires, maintenance
and emergency roadside service.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Refueling
182
Refueling
Fuel filler door
Always switch off the engine before
refueling. If you do not, fuel cannot be
filled into the tank and a message in the
Check Control will appear.<
To open and close: press the rear edge of
the fuel filler door.
Manual release
In the event of an electrical defect in the
system, you can release the fuel filler door
manually:
1. Lift the handle to remove the cover
panel on the right side of the luggage
compartment
2. Take the button with the fuel pump
symbol from the bracket and pull it to
unlock the fuel filler door.
Always observe all applicable precau-
tions and regulations when handling
fuels. Never carry spare fuel containers in
your vehicle. Whether empty or full, these
containers can leak, cause an explosion,
and lead to fire in the event of a collision.<
Simple and environmentally friendly
When handling fuels always observe
any safety guidelines posted at the fil-
ling station.<
Put the filler cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler door.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Pulling the nozzle
out of the pipe during refueling
> results in premature pump shutoff
> can lead to reduced efficiency in the
fuel-vapor recovery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle
clicks off the first time.
Close the filler cap carefully after refu-
eling, continuing until you hear the
detent engage. While closing, be sure not
to squeeze the strap which is fastened to
the cap. A loose or missing cap will activate
a message in the Check Control.<
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 23.2 US gallons
(88 liters), including the reserve capacity of
approx. 2.6 gallons (10 liters).
Never attempt to continue driving
until the tank is completely empty, as
engine functions could be affected, and the
vehicle could sustain damage as a result.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
183
Fuel specifications
The engine uses lead-free gasoline only.
Required fuel:
> Premium Unleaded Gasoline,
min. 91 AKI.
AKI = Anti-Knock Index.
Do not use leaded fuels. The use of
leaded fuels will cause permanent
damage to the system's oxygen sensor and
the catalytic converter.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
184
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Information for your safety
The factory-mounted tires have been spe-
cially selected to provide optimal perfor-
mance when installed on your vehicle; if
properly cared for they will furnish a combi-
nation of tremendous safety and excellent
ride comfort.
It is not merely the tire's service life, but
also driving comfort and – above all else –
driving safety that depend on the condition
of the tires and the maintenance of the spe-
cified tire pressure.
Incorrect inflation pressure is a frequent
cause of tire damage. Tire inflation pres-
sures also have a substantial effect on your
BMW's handling response.
Check tire inflation pressures regu-
larly – at least every two weeks and
before beginning a longer trip. If you fail to
observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a con-
dition that can not only compromise your
vehicle's stability, but also lead to tire
damage and the risk of an accident.
Remember to check the inflation pressure
in your spare tire. Inflate the spare to the
highest pressure specified for any tire on
the vehicle.<
The inflation pressures, provided on a label
affixed to the B-pillar, are visible when the
driver's door is open.
Checking inflation pressure
The table on the next page provides the
correct inflation pressures for cool tires,
ambient temperature, in psi/kilopascal.
Vehicles with Flat Tire Monitor or TPM Tire
Pressure Monitor:
After mounting a spare tire or correcting
the inflation pressure(s) always reinitialize
the system, refer to page 98 or 99.
Complying with tire approval
specifications
The inflation pressures in the table apply to
tire sizes and tires from BMW approved
manufacturers. Your BMW center is familiar
with these pressures. Different pressures
may be specified for tires from other
manufacturers.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
185
BMW 745i, 745Li
BMW 760Li
Tire size
Pressure specifications in
psi/kPa
245/55 R 17, including M+S
245/50 R 18, including M+S
32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290
Front: 245/45 R 19 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19 - 35/240 - 42/290
Front: 245/40 R 20 32/220 - 35/240
Rear: 275/35 R 20 - 35/240 - 42/290
Tire size
Pressure specifications in
psi/kPa
245/50 R 18, including M+S 35/240 38/260 38/260 42/290
Front: 245/45 R 19 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19 - 38/260 - 42/290
Front: 245/40 R 20 35/240 - 38/260
Rear: 275/35 R 20 - 38/260 - 42/290
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
186
Tire condition
Tire tread – tire damage
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects
lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.
The tread depth should not drop below
0.12 in (3 mm), although, for example,
European legislation only specifies a
minimum tread depth of 0.06 in (1.6 mm).
At tread depths below 0.12 in (3 mm) there
is an increased risk of high-speed hydro-
planing, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
Wear indicators at the tread-groove base,
see arrow, are distributed over the tire's
circumference and are marked on the tire
sidewall with TWI – Tread Wear Indicator.
These indicators signal at a tread depth of
0.06 in (1.6 mm) that the legal wear limit
has been reached.
Never attempt to continue driving on
a flat tire. Because a flat tire will
seriously impair your vehicle's handling
and braking response, attempts to drive on
a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the
vehicle.
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never overload
the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and damage inside the tires. The
ultimate result can assume the form of a
sudden air loss.
Unusual vibrations encountered during
normal vehicle operation can indicate tire
failure or some other vehicle defect. This
can, for example, be caused by driving over
curbs. These kinds of problems may also
be signaled by other changes in vehicle
response, such as a strong tendency to pull
to the left or right. Should this occur,
respond by immediately reducing your
speed. Carefully proceed – or have your
vehicle towed – to the nearest BMW center
or tire dealer to have the wheels or tires
inspected.
Tire damage, extending to sudden and
complete loss of pressure in extreme
cases, can pose a potentially lethal safety
hazard for the vehicle's occupants and
other road users alike.<
Run-flat tires*
Run-flat tires consist of self-contained tires
and special rims. The tire reinforcement
ensures that the tire retains some residual
safety in the event of pressure drop and
driving remains possible to a restricted
degree, refer to page 200.
The vehicle is equipped with a Flat Tire
Monitor or TPM Tire Pressure Monitor
which indicates flat tires.
Tire replacement
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread
configuration from a single manufacturer.
BMW tests and approves specific wheel
and tire combinations.
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.<
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
187
wear one and one-half – 1g – times as
well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differ-
ences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.<
Temperature
The temperature grades are A – the
highest –, B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combina-
tion, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.<
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where appli-
cable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
Do not use retreaded tires, since dri-
ving safety may be impaired. Possible
variations in the design and the age – which
could be substantial – of the carcasses can
lead to unusually rapid wear.<
Tire age
The tire's date of manufacture is indicated
on the sidewall:
DOT ... 3402 indicates that a tire was
manufactured in week 34 of the year 2002.
Regardless of mileage or wear, BMW
recommends that you replace all tires –
including the spare – after a maximum of
6 years, even though the tires may have a
theoretical service life of up to 10 years.
Wheel and tire
combinations
The right choice
Use only wheel and tire combinations
that BMW has approved for your par-
ticular vehicle. Variations in factors such as
manufacturing tolerances mean that even
wheels and tires with identical official size
ratings could actually have different dimen-
sions than the approved units – these diffe-
rences could lead to body contact, and
with it the risk of severe accidents. If non-
approved wheels and tires are used, BMW
cannot evaluate their suitability, and there-
fore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<
BMW tests certain tire brands for each tire
size, classifies them as road-safe and
approves them. Consult your BMW center
for more information. Observe any country-
specific regulations, e.g. on making a cor-
responding entry in the vehicle documents.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
188
The correct combination of wheels
and tires is a vital factor in ensuring
reliable operation of various vehicle sys-
tems such as ABS and DSC.
It is therefore important to ensure that tires
from a single manufacturer with a single
tread configuration are always mounted on
all vehicle wheels; after a flat tire, always
remember to have the specified wheel and
tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.<
Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as pos-
sible. Always protect tires against all con-
tact with oil, grease and fuels.
Special characteristics of
winter tires
Choosing the right tire
BMW recommends winter tires – M+S tires
for use in cold winter driving conditions.
Although all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than standard
summer tires with H, V, W and ZR speed
ratings, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance
as winter tires.
When mounting, always install winter tires
of a single tread configuration and from a
single manufacturer on all four wheels to
ensure safe tracking and secure steering
response.
Observing speed ratings
Never exceed the maximum speed for
which the winter tires are rated.
Unprofessional attempts by laymen to ser-
vice tires can lead to damage and acci-
dents.
Have this work performed by skilled pro-
fessionals only. The technicians at your
BMW center will be glad to assist you with
the required professional knowledge and
specialized equipment.<
Tire condition, tire pressure
Because winter tires display a noticeable
loss in their ability to cope with cold-wea-
ther driving conditions once the tread
wears to below 0.16 in (4 mm), to ensure
continued safety you should always have
such tires replaced.
Always maintain the specified inflation
pressures in all tires, and remember to
have the wheel and tire assemblies bal-
anced every time either a wheel or a tire is
replaced.
Snow chains*
BMW only tests certain snow chains, clas-
sifies them as road-safe and approves
them. Consult your BMW center for more
information. BMW recommends only using
these approved, narrow-link snow chains.
These snow chains are approved exclusi-
vely for use in pairs on the rear wheels, and
should only be mounted on tires with the
dimensions 245/50 R 18. Observe the
manufacturer's instructions when installing
snow chains. Do not exceed a vehicle
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) with the chains
mounted.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
189
Under the hood
Hood
Releasing
Pull the lever located under the left side of
the instrument panel.
Never attempt to perform any service
or repair operations on your vehicle
without the required, professional technical
training. When you are unfamiliar with the
service procedures and precautions,
always have any required work carried out
at your BMW center. Unprofessional
attempts at service and repair, and the
incorrect handling of parts and materials
that can occur during such attempts, con-
stitute a potential safety hazard, both for
the vehicle's occupants and for other road
users.<
Opening
Pull the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx.
16 in (40 cm) with momentum. It must be
clearly heard to engage.
Observe the same precautions that
apply to all closing operations by
ensuring that the hood's travel range is
clear and unobstructed before allowing the
hood to fall into position.
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving your
vehicle, you should stop at once and close
it securely.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Under the hood
190
Engine compartment
1 Engine oil dipstick, see below,
Checking oil level
2 Brake fluid reservoir, located beneath
the microfilter cover 192
3 Reservoir for windshield and headlamp
washer system 73
4 Engine oil filler neck 191
5 Coolant expansion tank 192
6 Auxiliary terminal for jump starting 203
Engine oil
Checking oil level
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface
2. Switch the engine off after it has
reached normal operating temperature
3. After approx. 5 minutes, pull the dip-
stick out and wipe it off with a clean lint-
free cloth, paper towel, or similar mate-
rial
4. Carefully push the dipstick all the way
into the guide tube and pull it out again
5. The oil should extend to between the
two marks on the dipstick.
As is the case with fuel economy, the rate
at which the engine uses oil is strongly
influenced by driving style and operating
conditions.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
191
The oil quantity between the two marks on
the dipstick is approx. 1.1 US quarts
(1 liter). Do not fill beyond the upper mark
on the dipstick. Excess oil can damage the
engine.
Adding engine oil
Wait until the level has dropped to just
above the lower mark before adding oil.
BMW engines are designed to ope-
rate without additives, and their use
could even lead to damage in some cases.
This also applies to the automatic transmis-
sion, the differential and the power steering
system.<
Recommendation: have your oil changed
only at your BMW center.
Continuous exposure to used oil has
caused cancer in laboratory testing.
For this reason, any skin areas that come
into contact with oil should be thoroughly
washed with soap and water.
Always store oil, grease, etc., well out of
the reach of children; always observe all
warning labels on the containers.<
Always observe all applicable rules
and regulations for environmental
protection when disposing of used oil.<
Specified engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has
critical significance for the operation and
service life of an engine. BMW approves
only specific oils after confirming their sui-
tability for use in its vehicles with extensive
testing.
Use only approved BMW High Perfor-
mance Synthetic Oil.
If you are unable to obtain BMW High Per-
formance Synthetic Oil, you can add small
amounts of another synthetic oil between
oil changes. Use only oils with the API SH
specification or higher.
Ask your BMW center for details con-
cerning the specific BMW High Per-
formance Synthetic Oil or synthetic oils
which have been approved.<
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit this website:
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this informa-
tion.
Viscosity ratings
Viscosity is the oil flow rating as defined in
SAE classes.
The selection of the correct SAE class
depends on the climatic conditions in the
area where you typically drive your BMW.
Approved oils are in SAE classes
5W-40 and 5W-30.<
These oils may be used for driving in all
ambient temperatures.
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling
system when the engine is hot.
Escaping coolant can cause burns.
Antifreeze and anticorrosion agents are
hazardous to health. Always store these
agents in tightly-closed original containers
kept well away from the reach of children.
Antifreeze and anticorrosion agents are
flammable. Therefore, do not pour over hot
engine parts, as otherwise they could catch
fire and cause burns. Always observe the
instructions for use provided on the con-
tainer.<
Always observe all applicable rules
and regulations for environmental
protection when disposing of used anti-
freeze and anti-corrosion agents.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Under the hood
192
Checking coolant level
Correct coolant level with the engine cold
– approx. +687 (206):
1. Turn the cap of the expansion tank
counterclockwise to allow any accumu-
lated pressure to escape, then continue
turning to open
2. The coolant level is correct when the
coolant extends to between the MIN
and MAX marks on the filler neck, refer
to the diagram adjacent to the filler
neck
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant
up to the specified level – do not overfill.
Brake fluid
The symbol lights up and a mes-
sage appears in the Check Control
panel:
The brake fluid in the reservoir has fallen to
below the minimum level.
The brake fluid reservoir is located under
the microfilter housing trim panel on the
driver's side of the vehicle. To have brake
fluid added to the system, or to have the
source of any brake fluid loss traced and
rectified, please contact your BMW center,
which can also supply the factory-
approved – DOT 4 – brake fluids.
Brake fluid is hygroscopic: it absorbs
moisture from the atmosphere over
the course of time.
To ensure that the brake system continues
to provide safe and reliable performance,
remember to have the brake fluid changed
every two years at the latest, refer to
page 84 and to the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US models or the
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
Brake fluid is toxic and also damages
vehicle paintwork. Always store these
agents in tightly-closed original containers
kept well away from the reach of children.
Do not spill the fluid and do not refill the
brake fluid reservoir to beyond the MAX
mark. Should it come into contact with hot
engine components, the brake fluid could
ignite and cause personal injury in the form
of burns.<
Always observe all applicable envi-
ronmental rules and regulations when
disposing of used brake fluid.<
Warning lamp for Canadian models.
Brake hydraulic systems
A low brake-fluid level combined with
longer-than-usual pedal travel could be a
sign that one of the brake system's
hydraulic circuits has failed.
Proceed to the nearest BMW center.
Remember that pedal travel may be
increased, and there may also be a sub-
stantial increase in the amount of pedal
pressure required to brake the vehicle.
Please adapt your driving style accor-
dingly.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
193
Maintenance
The BMW Maintenance
System
The BMW Maintenance System is desi-
gned to ensure that your vehicle will con-
tinue to furnish consistent reliability com-
bined with optimal safety. The service
schedule also includes operations related
to the vehicle's comfort and convenience
features, such as replacement of the filters
for the inside air. The ultimate object is to
furnish economical maintenance by provi-
ding the ideal service for your individual
vehicle.
Should the day come when you decide to
sell your BMW, you will find that a complete
dealer service history is an asset of inesti-
mable value.
CBS Condition Based Service
CBS is a more advanced version of the Ser-
vice Interval Display. Sensors combine with
highly-specialized algorithms to supply
service information that reflects your
vehicle's actual operating conditions more
precisely than ever before.
The system now furnishes individual dis-
plays of the times remaining until the dead-
lines for specific service operations as well
as official state inspections:
> Engine oil
> Brakes – separate for front and rear
> Particle/activated-charcoal filter
> Brake fluid
> Spark plugs
> Vehicle check
> Coolant
> Official state inspections.
CBS monitors both current and upcoming
service requirements. After accessing the
data stored in the vehicle's key, your BMW
service advisor is able to suggest precisely
the right array of service procedures for
your own individual vehicle.
By letting you define a service and mainte-
nance regimen that reflects your own indi-
vidual requirements, Condition Based Ser-
vice builds the basis for trouble-free
driving.
You can find more detailed information on
the Service Interval Display on page 83.
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US models and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian
models for additional information on ser-
vice requirements.
Have service and repair operations
performed at your BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service
procedures are confirmed by entries in
your vehicle's Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These
entries verify that your vehicle has received
the specified regular maintenance, and
may also be required when submitting war-
ranty claims.<
Care
You can find everything you need to know
on this topic by consulting the separate
Care manual.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Rules and regulations
194
Rules and regulations
California Proposition 65
Warning
California laws require us to state the fol-
lowing warning:
Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
ents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in
vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that
have caused cancer in laboratory animals.
Always protect your skin by washing tho-
roughly with soap and water.<
OBD connector
The Onboard Diagnostic – OBD – interface
socket is located on the left of the driver's
side under the instrument panel and under
a cover.
The cover has the letters OBD on it.
The purpose of the OBD system is to
ensure proper operation of the emission
control system for the vehicle's lifetime.
The system monitors emission-related
components and systems for deterioration
and malfunction.
An illuminated lamp informs you of
the need for service, not of the need
to stop the vehicle. However, the
systems should be checked by your BMW
center at the earliest possible opportunity.
Under certain conditions, the indicator will
blink or flash. This indicates a rather severe
level of engine misfire. When this occurs,
you should reduce speed and consult the
nearest BMW center as soon as possible.
Severe engine misfire over only a short
period of time can seriously damage emis-
sions control components, especially the
catalytic converter.
When the fuel filler cap is not properly
tightened, the OBD system can
detect the vapor leak and the indicator will
light up. If the filler cap is subsequently
tightened, the indicator should go out
within a few days.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
OverviewControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
195
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
The onboard tool kit is located in the lug-
gage compartment lid.
Loosen the wingnut to open.
The adapter for the spare key can be stored
beneath the open-ended spanners.
Windshield wiper blades
To replace the blades, start by folding the
wipers out and away from the windshield,
refer to page 73.
Lamps and bulbs
The lamps and bulbs are essential factors
contributing to the safety of your vehicle.
Therefore, comply fully with the following
instructions during bulb replacement. If you
are not familiar with the specified proce-
dures, have the replacements carried out at
your BMW center.
Never touch the glass on new bulbs
with your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life.
Use a clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the
bulb by its metal socket.<
You can obtain a selection of replacement
bulbs at your BMW center.
To prevent short circuits, before wor-
king on any electrical system, equip-
ment or accessory you should always
switch it off and disconnect the cable from
the battery's negative terminal before star-
ting.
To avoid possible injury or equipment
damage when changing bulbs, observe any
instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
When maintaining the headlamps,
please comply with the instructions in
the separate Care manual.<
Headlamps
For checking and adjusting headlamp
aim, please contact your BMW
center.<
Engine compartment, left side:
Turn the quick-release fasteners 905 coun-
terclockwise and remove the cover.
After replacing the bulb return the cover to
its original position and press the quick-
release fasteners down.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Replacing components
196
Releasing the lamp cover
The illustration shows the left-hand side of
the engine compartment.
1 High beams
Press the tab down, see arrow.
Always wear gloves and eye protec-
tion – the atmosphere within the bulb
is pressurized. Failure to observe this pre-
caution can lead to personal injury should
the bulb be damaged.<
1 High beams
H7 bulb, 55 watts
1. Remove the cover
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and
remove
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
Xenon lamps
The service life of these bulbs is very long
and the probability of a failure is very low,
provided that they are not switched on and
off an unusual number of times. In the
unlikely event that one of these lamps
should fail, you can respond by switching
on your fog lamps and proceeding care-
fully, where allowed by law.
To avoid risk of potentially fatal inju-
ries: owing to the extremely high vol-
tages at which these units operate, service
work should always be entrusted to quali-
fied personnel.<
Parking and standing lamps
In the event of a malfunction, please con-
tact your BMW center.
Turn signal indicator, front
Two bulbs 21 watts – P 21 W
1. Turn the bulb holder to the left and
remove
2. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and
replacement.
Side-mounted turn signal indicators
Bulb 5 watts – W 5 W
1. Press against the front edge of the lamp
with the tip of your finger, then push it to
the rear and release the detent at the
front
2. Turn the lamp 903 and remove
3. Turn the bulb holder to the left and
remove
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
OverviewControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
197
4. Extract the bulb for replacement.
Side marker lamps, front and rear
Please contact your BMW center for
replacement.
Tail lamps
1 Tail lamp
2 Brake lamp
3 Backup lamp
4 Turn signal indicator, yellow
5 Reflector
Tail lamps and brake lamps
These lamps use LED technology for oper-
ation. Please contact a BMW center in case
of a malfunction.
Fender-mounted lamps
The illustration shows the recess on the left
side of the luggage compartment.
Rear turn signal indicator
Bulb 21 watts – P 21 W
1. Use the handle at the top to swivel
down the side trim panel
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and
remove
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and
replacement.
Lamps in luggage compartment lid
Remove the trim panel from the luggage
compartment lid.
1 Backup lamp
2 License plate lamp
Backup lamps and license plate
lamps
Backup lamp: bulb 16 watts – W 16 W
License plate lamp: bulb 5 watts – W 5 W
1. Pull the bulb holder out
2. Extract the bulb for replacement.
Changing a tire
Safety precautions to observe in the
event of a flat and during all tire
changes:
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
passing traffic. Park on a firm, flat surface.
Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
Engage the parking brake and move the
transmission's selector lever to P.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain outside
the immediate area in a safe place, such as
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Replacing components
198
behind a guardrail.
If a warning triangle or portable hazard
warning lamp is required, set it up on the
roadside at an appropriate distance from
the rear of the vehicle. Comply with all
safety guidelines and regulations.
Change the wheel only on a level, firm sur-
face which is not slippery. The vehicle or
the jack could slip to the side if you attempt
to raise the vehicle on a soft or slippery sur-
face such as snow, ice, tiles, etc.
Position the jack on a firm support surface.
Do not use a wooden block or similar
object as a support base for the jack, as
this would prevent it from extending to its
full support height and reduce its load-
carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie
under the vehicle, and never start the
engine while it is supported by the jack.<
What you will need
To avoid rattling noises, note the positions
of the tools before removing them, then
return them to their initial positions after
completing work.
> Lug wrench
Located beside the spare tire
> Wheel chock
The chock is located next to the spare
tire, or behind the trim panel on the left
side of the luggage compartment on
vehicles equipped with a trailer cou-
pling.
Remove the floor mat and the cover
above the spare tire.
Unscrew the wingnut and remove the
wheel chock
> Vehicle jack
The jack is located behind the side trim
panel on the right side of the luggage
compartment.
Grasp the handle in the upper panel
and fold it down.
Undo the wingnut and remove the jack.
After use, screw the jack all the way
back down and snap the handle back
into place.
Spare tire
1. Unscrew the wing nut 1
2. Remove the disk 2 to the side
3. Completely unscrew the threaded rod 3
4. Remove the wheel.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
OverviewControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
199
Procedure
1. Read carefully and comply with the
safety precautions on page 198
2. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling:
Place the wheel chock against the rear
surface of the front tire on the side
opposite the side being raised. If the
vehicle is parked on a downward slope,
place the wheel chock securely in front
of the tire. If the wheel must be changed
on a surface with a more severe slope,
take additional precautions to secure
the vehicle from rolling
3. Loosen the lug bolts 1/2 a turn
4. Set up the jack beneath the jacking
point closest to the flat tire. Ensure that
the entire surface of the jack's base is in
firm contact with the ground and that
the jack itself is standing completely
vertical, not tilted, and that the fitting on
the top of the jack will align with the
rectangular recess on the vehicle when
you raise it, refer to illustration
5. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you
are changing is raised from the ground
6. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel
7. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt
from the mounting surfaces of the
wheel and hub. Clean the lug bolts
8. Position the spare wheel. Secure the
wheel by turning at least two lug bolts
into opposite bolt holes
9. Screw in the remaining lug bolts.
Tighten all the bolts securely in a diag-
onal pattern
10.Lower the jack and remove it from
beneath the vehicle
11.Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pat-
tern
12.Check and correct the tire inflation
pressure at the earliest opportunity.
Protect valve stems and valve stem
seal caps against dirt and contamina-
tion. Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source
of gradual air loss.<
Vehicles with a Flat Tire Monitor or TPM
Tire Pressure Monitor:
After mounting a spare tire or correcting
the inflation pressure(s) always reinitialize
the system, refer to page 98 or 99.
The vehicle jack is designed for chan-
ging wheels only. Do not attempt to
raise another vehicle model with it or to
raise any load of any kind. To do so could
cause accidents and personal injury.
To ensure safety, always have the lug bolts
checked with a calibrated torque wrench to
ensure that they are tightened to the speci-
fied torque of 140 Nm as soon as pos-
sible.<
Reverse the removal sequence to store the
wheel and tools in the vehicle.
When you mount wheels other than Ori-
ginal BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug
bolts may also be required.
Always have damaged tires replaced and
the wheel and tire assembly rebalanced at
the earliest possible opportunity.
Driving with the spare tire
On certain wheel-tire combinations,
the size of the spare tire deviates from
that of the rest of the tires. The spare tire is
fully capable of running in all load and
speed ranges. However, to recreate the
original conditions, the tire should be
replaced as soon as possible.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Replacing components
200
Run-flat tires*
You will recognize run-flat tires by a cir-
cular symbol containing the letters RSC on
the side of the tire. They consist of self-
contained tires and special rims. The tire
reinforcement ensures that the tire retains
some residual safety in the event of pres-
sure drop and driving remains possible to
a restricted degree. The vehicle is
equipped with a Flat Tire Monitor or TPM
Tire Pressure Monitor which indicates
punctures.
The reinforcement on the flanks of the
tires means that it is usually not pos-
sible to detect an air loss from outside.<
Flat tire
If you have a flat tire, the indicator lamp
symbol in the Check Control will light up in
red, and a message will appear. In addition,
a gong sounds.
Detailed information on the Flat Tire Mon-
itor or TPM Tire Pressure Monitor can be
found on page 98 or 99.
Reduce vehicle speed carefully to under
50 mph (80 km/h), avoiding hard brake
applications and steering maneuvers.
If the defective wheel is not recognizable
as such immediately, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
For reasons of safety, do not arrange
for run-flat tires to be repaired. Your
BMW center has the information needed
for working with these tires and is equipped
with the necessary special tools.<
Continuing driving with a damaged
tire
Driving on run-flat tires can continue
depending on the vehicle load and the
severity of the tire damage, at a maximum
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). You can deter-
mine the possible mileage for continued
driving on the basis of the following general
indications:
> Tire inflation pressure 0 psi/kPa:
With empty vehicle approx. 90 miles
(150 km)
With full payload approx. 30 miles
(50 km)
> Tire inflation pressure 7 psi/50 kPa –
15 psi/100 kPa:
Approx. 300 miles (500 km)
> Tire inflation pressure greater than
15 psi/100 kPa:
approx. 600 miles (1000 km).
Drive reservedly and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). In the
case of air loss, you can expect changes in
vehicle handling such as reduce lane sta-
bility, longer braking distances, and
changes in self-steering properties.<
Battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e.,
the electrolyte will last for the life of the bat-
tery when the vehicle is operated in a tem-
perate climate.
For all questions that regard the bat-
tery, please consult your BMW
center. Since the battery is maintenance-
free, the following is for your information
only.<
Charging the battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via
the terminals in the engine compartment
with the engine off. Connections, refer to
Jump-starting on page 203.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
OverviewControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
201
To avoid short circuits, as well as pos-
sible fires and personal injury, always
disconnect the cable from the battery's
negative terminal before working on the
vehicle's electrical system.<
Battery switch
Before storing the vehicle for an extended
period of several weeks or more, slide the
battery switch located behind the trim
panel on the right side of the luggage com-
partment to OFF. This reduces the current
flow from the battery for the period during
which the vehicle remains parked.
A message appears in the Check Control
panel. Please take note of the supplemen-
tary information provided in the Control
Display.
Never disconnect either battery cable
from its terminal while the engine is
running – the resulting voltage surge would
destroy the vehicle's electronic systems.<
Disposal
Return used batteries to a recycling
point or your BMW center. Maintain
the battery in an upright position for trans-
port and storage. Always restrain the bat-
tery to prevent it from tipping over during
transport.<
Fuses
Spare fuses are located on the fuse strip in
the glove compartment; plastic tweezers
can be found at the fuse holder in the lug-
gage compartment.
In the glove compartment
Press the tab on the cover to the front, then
fold up the cover.
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse,
and do not replace a defective fuse
with a substitute of another color or
amperage rating, as this could lead to a cir-
cuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in
the vehicle.<
In the luggage compartment
Use the handle to pull down the trim on the
right wall.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
202
Giving and receiving assistance
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is conveniently stored
in the onboard tool kit mounted on the
inside of the luggage compartment lid.
Comply with legal requirements
requiring you to carry a hazard war-
ning triangle in the vehicle.<
First-aid kit*
You will also find the first-aid kit in the
onboard tool kit's container.
Some of the articles contained in the
first-aid kit have a limited service life.
For this reason, check the expiration dates
of each of the items regularly, and replace
any whose expiration dates have passed.
You can find replacements in any phar-
macy.
Always comply with laws requiring a first-
aid kit to be carried in the vehicle.<
Jump-starting
When your battery is discharged you can
use two jumper cables to start your vehicle
with power from the battery in a second
vehicle. You can also use the same method
to help start another vehicle. Use only
jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp
handles.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal
injury, always avoid all contact with
electrical components while the engine is
running. Carefully adhere to the following
sequence, both to prevent damage to one
or both vehicles, and to guard against pos-
sible personal injury.<
Preparing
1. Check whether the battery of the sup-
port vehicle has 12 Volts and approxi-
mately the same capacity (Ah). This
information can be found on the battery
2. Switch off the engine of the support
vehicle
3. Switch off any electrical systems and
components in both vehicles.
Ensure that no contact exists bet-
ween the bodywork on the two
vehicles – danger of short circuits.<
Connect the jumper cables
To avoid personal injury from sparks,
always observe this sequence when
connecting jumper cables.<
Your BMW is equipped with an auxiliary
terminal specifically designed for jump-
starting. It is located within the engine
compartment, see arrow 1 in the illustra-
tion. The symbol + is embossed on the
cover.
1. Remove the cover of the BMW auxiliary
terminal for jump starting
2. Use the jumper cable (+) to set up a
connection between the positive ter-
minal of the discharged battery and the
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
203
positive terminal of the support battery.
To do so:
Connect one terminal clamp to the pos-
itive terminal of the battery or to an aux-
iliary terminal for jump starting on the
support vehicle. Connect the second
terminal clamp on the positive terminal
of the battery or an auxiliary terminal for
jump starting of the vehicle to be
started.
On your BMW, there is a special nut as
body ground on the suspension strut
dome, see arrow 2 in the illustration
3. Use the second jumper cable to set up
the connection between the negative
terminals of both vehicles.
To do so:
Connect a terminal clamp to the nega-
tive terminal of the battery and/or to an
engine or body ground of the support
vehicle.Connect the second terminal
clamp to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground
of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine on the support vehicle
and allow it to run for several minutes at
a fast idle
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in
the usual way.
If the first start attempt is not suc-
cessful, wait a few minutes before ano-
ther attempt in order to allow the
discharged battery to recharge
3. Allow the engines to run for several
minutes
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by
reversing the connection sequence.
If required, have the battery inspected and
recharged at your BMW center.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Towing
Even if the transmission is in perfect
working order, remember to disen-
gage the transmission lockout manually
before towing the vehicle. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in
automatic activation of the transmission
lockout while the vehicle is being towed.<
Releasing transmission lockout manually,
refer to page 70.
Tow fitting
The threaded tow fitting is stored in the tool
kit mounted on the inside of the luggage
compartment lid, refer to page 195, and
should always remain in the vehicle. This
fitting, which fits the tow sockets on both
the front and the rear of the vehicle, is
intended exclusively for use in towing the
vehicle on paved roads.
Access to tow sockets
Press the arrow symbol to push out the
cover.
Front
Rear
Screw the tow fitting in until it bot-
toms firmly. If this is not done, the
threads could be damaged.
Never attempt to tow or tie down the
vehicle using suspension components, as
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
204
this could lead to damage that might ulti-
mately result in an accident.<
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use either a tow bar or a
nylon rope.
Keep the vehicles in line, taking care
to avoid towing at an offset angle, and
make certain that the tow rope connecting
the two vehicles is tight before starting
off.<
Tow bars
The tow fittings used should be on the
same side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid moun-
ting the tow bar at an offset angle, please
observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability
will be strictly limited in corners
> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar
will exert lateral forces, tending to push
the vehicle sideways.
Never use a vehicle to tow another
vehicle that is heavier than itself, as
this could lead to a loss of control.<
Towing
Do not tow the vehicle by the rear
axle; because the steering detent is
not operational, the wheels could turn to an
extreme angle during towing.<
1. Turn on the ignition to allow operation
of the brake lamps, turn signal indica-
tors, horn, parking brake and winds-
hield wipers
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers
where allowed by law
3. Release the transmission lockout man-
ually, refer to page 70
4. Towing speed:
maximum of 45 mph (70 km/h)
5. Towing distance:
maximum of 90 miles (150 km).
If the electrical system in the towed vehicle
has failed, use an alternate means to iden-
tify the vehicle as being towed such as a
sign or warning triangle placed in the rear
window.
The steering and brakes are without
power assistance when the engine is
off. This means that higher levels of effort
will be required to operate the steering and
brakes.<
Tow-starting
It is not possible to start the engine by tow-
starting the vehicle.
Jump-starting, refer to page 203.
Have the source of the starting difficulties
diagnosed and repaired at your BMW
center.
Towing with a commercial tow truck
> Do not tow with sling-type equipment
> Use a wheel lift or flatbed carrier
> Please comply with applicable towing
laws.
Never allow passengers to ride in a
towed vehicle for any reason.<
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
205
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Reference
This is where to look to find
information on any desired topic as
quickly as possible.
This chapter includes the section
with technical information as well
as the manual's index.
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Technical data
208
Technical data
Engine specifications
BMW 745i, 745Li BMW 760Li
Displacement
Number of cylinders
cu in/cmm 268.4/4,398
8
5972
12
Maximum output
at engine speed
hp
rpm
325
6,100
438
6,000
Maximum torque
at engine speed
lb ft/Nm
rpm
330/450
3,600
444/600
3,950
Compression ratio ε 10.0 11.3
Stroke
Bore
in/mm
in/mm
3.26/82.7
3.6/92.0
3.15/80.0
3.50/89.0
Fuel-injection system Digital electronic engine-management system
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
209
Dimensions
All dimensions specified in in (mm). Lower section of page: Li models.
Min. turning circle dia.: 39.7 ft (12.1 m); Li models: 41.3 ft (12.6 m).
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Technical data
210
Weights
Never exceed either the approved axle
loads or the gross vehicle weight.
BMW 745i BMW 745Li
Curb weight lbs./kg 4,376/1,985 4,464/2,025
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 5,434/2,465 5,523/2,505
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,557/1,160 2,602/1,180
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,987/1,355 3,020/1,370
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100
Luggage compartment volume cu ft/l 17.7/500
BMW 760Li
Curb weight lbs./kg 4,872/2,210
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 5,930/2,690
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,833/1,285
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 3,109/1,410
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 220/100
Luggage compartment volume cu ft/l 17.7/500
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
211
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank
Reserve
gal./liters
gal./liters
approx. 23.2/88
approx. 2.6/10
Fuel specification:
page 183
Windshield and headlamp
washer system quarts/liters approx. 6.3/6.0 For details: page 73
Cooling system, including
heating
BMW 745i, 745Li
BMW 760Li
quarts/liters
quarts/liters
approx. 14.9/14.1
approx. 15.8/14.94 For details: page 191
Engine with oil filter renewal
BMW 745i, 745Li
BMW 760Li quarts/liters
quarts/liters
approx. 8.5/8.0
approx. 9.0/8.5
BMW High Performance
Synthetic Oil.
Specifications:
page 191
Automatic transmission and
differential –
Lifetime fluid, no fluid
change required
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
212
A
"ABC..." for
navigation 132, 133
ABS Antilock Braking
System 96
ACC, refer to Active cruise
control 75
"ACCEPT" for
navigation 136, 142
Accessories 8
Accessory position 61
Activated-charcoal
filter 111
Activation
– portable phone 174
Activation time 113
Active cruise control 75
– malfunctions 81
Active head restraints,
front 48
Active seat 52
Active seat ventilation 51
Adapter for spare key 34
Adaptive brake lamp 101
Adding washer fluid 73
"Address book" 140
Adjusting
– head restraints 47
– lumbar support 46
– seats 46
– shoulder support 46
– thigh support 46
Airbags 55
Air distribution 107, 109
Air outlet vents 105
Air pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 184
Air supply 107
– rear air conditioner 111
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 183
Alarm system 41
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 41
All-season tires 188
"AM..." 146, 149, 151
AM waveband 149
Anchorages 126
"ANGLE" in DVD mode 167
Antifreeze 191
– washer fluid 73
Antilock Braking System
ABS 96
Anti-theft system 35, 41
Approved gross vehicle
weight 210
Aquaplaning, refer to
Hydroplaning 124
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 120
Arrival time 88
"Arrow display" for
navigation 138
"AS ADDRESS"
– current location 142
– destination
input 132, 134, 135
– destination list 136
– directory creation 140
– home address 141
– in address directory 141
– most recent
destinations 136
"AS DEST."
– destination
input 132, 134, 135
– directory creation 140
– home address 141
– most recent
destinations 136
– with address
directory 140
Ashtray
– front 118
– rear 119
Assistance window
– Control Center 23
– help texts 23
– status lines 24
AUC Automatic
recirculated-air
control 107
"Audio" 146, 149
Audio 146
– adjusting the tone 147
– controls 146
– switching on/off 147
– volume 147
"AUDIO" in DVD mode 167
"AUTO", refer to Automatic
climate control 109
"AUTO" for audio
operation 151
Automatic
– air distribution 107
– cruise control 73
– headlamp control 102
– luggage compartment lid
control 36, 40
– steering wheel
adjustment 53
Automatic car wash, refer
to Care manual
Automatic climate
control 105
– rear air conditioner 111
– rear cooler 116
– settings 107
– settings in Control
Display 109
Automatic curb monitor 55
Automatic Hold
– parking 64
– parking brake 63
Everything from A to Z
Contents
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
213
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 107
Automatic transmission
with L mode 67
Automatic transmission
with Steptronic 69
– operation via buttons in
steering wheel 69
"AUTO P" 54, 64
"AUTOSTOR" 161
"Autostore" for radio
operation 150
Average fuel
consumption 88
Average speed 88
Avoid false alarms 41
"Avoid highway" 137
"Avoid route" 139
"Avoid sect." 139
"Avoid tolls" 137
Avoid unintentional
alarms 41
"A-Z" 175
B
Backrest adjustment 47
– front seats 46
– rear seats 47
Backrests, refer to
Seats 45
Backup lamp, bulb
replacement 197
Balance 147
"Balance" in sound system
operation 148
Bass 147
"Bass" in sound system
operation 148
Battery 200
– discharged 202
– switch 201
"BC", refer to Computer 88
Belts 50
Beverage holders 118
Blinds 115
Blower 107
BMW active seat 52
"BMW Assist" 19, 22, 178
– "Roadside
Assistance" 178
BMW Assist 178
BMW comfort seat 46
"BMW Services" 178
"Booktape" 158
Brake, malfunctions 192
Brake assistant, refer to
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 96
Brake fluid 192
Brake hydraulic
systems 192
Brake lamp, adaptive 101
Brake lamps, bulb
replacement 197
Brake pads 125, 193
Brakes 125
Brake system
– brake fluid 192
Break-in procedures 124
"Brief info" information
bulletin 23
"Brightness" during
TV operation 161
"Brightness" in the Control
Center 92
Bulb changes 195
Buttons in steering
wheel 18
– refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 69
C
California Proposition
65 Warning 194
Call
– ending 175
– making 174
Calling 174
– from telephone
directory 175
– from the redialing list 176
– from the Top 8 list 176
– redialing 176
Can holders, refer to
Beverage holders 118
Capacities 211
Car care, refer to Care
manual
"Car data" 19, 22
Cargo, securing 126
Cargo area
– emergency release 40
– manual operation 40
– opening and locking
separately 39
– opening from the
inside 39
– opening from the
outside 38
– operating via remote
control 36
Cargo loading 126
"Car parked" 109, 112
Car phone 171, 174
Car radio, refer to
Radio 146
Car wash 124
Car wash, refer to Care
manual
Cassette 158
Cassette deck 158
– adjusting the tone 147
– "Booktape" 158
– controls 146
– Dolby 158
– fast forward 159
– music search 159
– operating
temperatures 158
– reverse 159
– selecting tape side 158
– skipping pauses 159
– switching on 158
– volume 147
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 96
CBS Condition Based
Service 193
"CD" 146, 153
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
214
CD changer 155, 156
– adjusting the tone 147
– controls 146
– copy protection 155
– fast forward 157
– humidity 156
– operating
temperatures 156
– random play 157
– reverse 157
– safety 155
– sampling 157
– scan 157
– selecting CD 157
– selecting track 157
– skipping tracks 157
– switching on 156
– temperature range 156
– track search 157
– volume 147
CD player 153
– adjusting the tone 147
– atmospheric humidity 153
– controls 146
– fast forward 154
– operating
temperatures 153
– random play 154
– reverse 154
– sampling 154
– scan 154
– selecting track 154
– skipping tracks 154
– switching on 153
– temperature range 153
– track search 154
– volume 147
Cell phone, refer to
separate Portable phone
manual 170
"Center" 110
Center armrest 120
Center console, refer to
Comfort features 16
Central locking system 35
– button 38
– remote control 35
"CHANGE" for
navigation 136
Changing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 195
Changing language 91
Changing settings in the
Control Display 91
Changing units of measure
in Control Display 91
Check Control 85
– "Check" 86
Checking engine oil
level 190, 190
Checking tire
pressures 184
Child's seat 57
Child-restraint system 57
Child-safety lock 59
Cigarette lighter 119
Cleaning, refer to Care
manual
Cleaning windshield 72, 73
"Climate" 19, 22
Climate control
– automatic air
distribution 107
"Clock" 91
Clock 82
– setting time and date 91
Closing
– from inside 37
– from outside 35
Closing assist
– doors 38
– luggage compartment
lid 39
Cockpit 12, 16
Coin holder, refer to
Storage
compartments 117
Coin tray, refer to Storage
compartments 117
Cold start 62
"Color" during
TV operation 161
"Comfort"
– "EDC" 97
Comfort features 16
Comfort seat 46
– in rear 47
"Communication"
19, 22, 171
Compact Disc, refer to
CD 153
Compartments, refer to
Storage
compartments 117
Computer 86
Computer, refer to Control
Center 19
– automatic climate
control 109
– "BC" 89
– changing settings 91
– display, menus 22
– displays in the Control
Display 88
– language selection 91
– setting time and date 91
– status lines 24
– symbols 21
Condition Based Service
CBS 193
Confirming a menu item in
the Control Display 20
Connecting car vacuum
cleaner 119
Consumption display 87
"Contrast" during
TV operation 161
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
215
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
Control Center 19
– assistance window 23
– automatic climate
control 109
– changing menu page 20
– changing settings 91
– confirm selection or
entry 20
– display, menus 22
– display help texts 23
– language selection 91
– lists 20
– menu entry selection 20
– rear 24
– selecting units of measure
and display format 91
– setting time and date 91
– status lines 24
– symbols 21
– symbols and lists 20
Control Center, setting
brightness 92
Control Display 19
– rear 24
Controller, refer to Control
Center 19
Controls 12, 16
Convenience operation of
windows and sliding/tilt
sunroof 36, 37
Convenience starting
feature 62
Coolant 190, 191
Cooler, refer to Rear
cooler 116
Cooling adjustment
– rear air conditioner 111
Copyright 2
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 96
Country of destination 133
Courtesy lamps 104
Creating voice address
book 141
Cruise control
– active cruise control 75
Cruise control, refer to
Programmable cruise
control 73
Cruising range 87
Cup holders, refer to
Beverage holders 118
Curb lamp
– bulb replacement 196
Curb weight 210
Current fuel
consumption 88
"Customer Relations" 178
D
Dashboard 12, 16
Data 208
"Date" 91
Daytime driving lamps 102
DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 96
Deactivating
– interior motion
sensor 36, 41
– tilt alarm sensor 36, 41
Default settings 147
Defrosting windows and
removing
condensation 107
Defrosting windshield, refer
to Defrosting windows
and removing
condensation 107
Defrost setting 107
"DELETE" for
navigation 136, 137
Destination 132
Destination during
navigation
– selecting with
"Information" 135
– select using voice 141
Destination entry 132
Destination list for
navigation system 136
"Destinations" 132
"Dest. input" 132
"Detour" 139
Dialed numbers 176
Digital coverage area for
navigation 130
Dimensions 209
Dimming mirrors 52
Dipstick, engine oil 190
Direction
– arrow 138
– to destination 137
– voice instructions 140
Directional indicators, refer
to Turn signal
indicators 71
Disc brakes 125
Displacement 208
Display
– computer 22
– Control Center 22
Display, refer to Control
Display 19
Display format and units of
measure in Control
Display, changing 91
Display illumination 103
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 103
Displays 14
Distance 88
Distance tempomat
– refer to Active cruise
control 75
Distance to destination 88
Distance warning 93
"Dolby..." for audio
operation 159
Door keys 34
Door mirrors
– automatic dimming 52
Doors
– child-safety lock 59
– locking and unlocking 35
– manual operation 37
– remote control 35
DOT Quality Grades 186
Draft-free ventilation 108
Drink holders, refer to
Beverage holders 118
Driving stability
control 94, 96
Driving tips 124
"DSC" 95
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 94
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
216
"DTC" 95
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 15, 95
"DVD" 146, 164
DVD changer 162
– adjusting picture 166
– adjusting the tone 147
– chapter search 166
– controls 146
– copy protection 162
– country codes 163
– DVD controller 164
– fast forward 165
– fast reverse 165
– freezing frame 166
– humidity 163
– media formats 162
– operating
temperatures 163
– safety 162
– searching for chapter 166
– selecting a track 165
– selecting camera
angle 167
– selecting DVD 165
– selecting language 167
– selecting picture
format 166
– selecting subtitles 167
– specific menu 167
– switching on 164
– temperature range 163
– volume 147
DVD Multimedia changer,
refer to DVD changer 162
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 96
Dynamic Drive 97
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 94
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 15, 95
E
EBV Electronic brake-force
distribution 96
"EDC" 97
– "Comfort" 97
– "Sport" 97
EDC Electronic Damping
Control 97
Electrical malfunction
– automatic transmission
lockout 70
– fuel filler door 182
– parking brake, emergency
use 65
– sliding/tilt sunroof 44
Electric power seats 46
Electric power windows 42
Electric seats 46
Electric steering wheel
adjustment 53
Electronic brake-force
distribution EBV 96
Electronic Damping Control
EDC 97
Electronic toll collection
device, refer to Entry/
pass tags 127
Emergency operation
– automatic transmission
lockout 70
– doors 37
– fuel filler door 182
– luggage compartment
lid 40
– parking brake 65
– sliding/tilt sunroof 44
Emergency SOS call 173
"Emissions inspection" 84
Energy Control 88
Engine compartment 190
"Engine coolant" 193
Engine coolant 190
"Engine oil" 193
Engine oil
– consumption 190
– grades 191
Engine oils 191
Engine output 208
Engine specifications 208
"Entertainment"
19, 22, 146
Entry/pass tags 127
Equalizer 147, 148
ESP, refer to DSC 94
Estimated time of arrival 88
Extended vehicle storage,
refer to separate Care
manual
Exterior mirrors 52
– automatic dimming 52
"Extra"
– with rear air
conditioner 112
– with rear cooler 116
"Extra" in "Climate"
menu 109
F
Fader 147
"Fader" in sound system
operation 148
Failure of an electrical
accessory 201
"Fastest route" 137
Fastest route 137
Fault displays 85
Filler door 182
Filling the washer
reservoir 73
First-aid kit 202
Fittings, tow-starting and
towing 204
Flashlight 117
Flat Tire Monitor 98
Flat tires 186
"FM..." 146, 149, 151
FM waveband 149
Fog lamps 103
"Footwell" 110
Footwell lamps 104
Forward lamps 104
Front armrest 117
Front seat adjustment 45
Fuel 183
Fuel capacity 182
Fuel consumption
display 88
Fuel economy 88
Fuel filler door 182
– releasing in the event of
electrical defect 182
Fuel gauge 87
Fuel level display 87, 88
"Fuel reserve" 87
Fuel specifications 183
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
217
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
Fuel tank capacity 182
"FULL MENU" 165, 166
"Full Release" 25
Fuses 201
G
Garage door opener, refer
to Integrated universal
remote control 114
Gasoline 183
General driving
instructions 124
Glasses compartment 118
Glove compartment 117
GPS, refer to Navigation
system 130
GPS navigation system
– selecting destination in
"Information" 135
Ground lamps 104
Guidance system
– interrupting 140
– starting 137
– terminating 140
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 62
Hand lamp 117
Hands-free
microphone 173
Hands-free system 173
Hazard warning flashers 16
Headlamp cleaning
system 73
Headlamp control,
automatic 102
Headlamp flasher 71
Headlamps
– automatic control 102
– cleaning 73
– high beams 103
– low beams 102
Headlamp washers 72
Head restraints 47
– front head restraints,
active 48
– rear head restraints 48
Heated seats 51
Heated steering wheel 53
Heating and ventilation 105
Heating while stopped 108
Height 209
Height adjustment
– seats 46
– steering wheel 53
"Help" 19, 22
Help texts in Control
Display 23
High beams 103
– bulb replacement 196
Home address 141
Hood release 189
Horn 13
Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to DBC 96
Hydroplaning 124, 186
I
Ice warning 82
idrive, refer to Control
Center 19
Ignition key 34
Ignition lock 61
"Indep. heater" 112
"Indep. ventil." 109, 112
Indicator lamps 15
"Individual" 110
Individual button
assignments on steering
wheel 53
Inflation pressure 184
Info Display 14
"Information" for
navigation 135, 136
Information on the
navigation system, refer
to Voice guidance for
navigation 139
Infrared windshield, refer to
Entry/pass tags 127
Instrument cluster, refer to
Info Display 14
Instrument illumination 103
Instrument panel 12, 16
Integrated universal remote
control 114
Interior lamps 103
– remote control 36
Interior mirrors 52
– automatic dimming 52
Interior motion sensor 42
Interior protection
– deactivation 36, 42
Interior rearview mirror 52
– automatic dimming 52
Intermittent wipe 72
J
Jack 198
Joystick, refer to Control
Center 19
Jump-starting 202
K
Key Memory 60
Keys 34
– adapter for spare key 34
Kickdown 68
L
Lamps 102
– fog lamps 103
– high beams/standing
lamps 103
– interior lamps 103
– parking lamps/low
beams 102
Language control 18, 26
"Last" 176
"Last dest." 136
"Last exit" 139
Latch, refer to
LATCH child-restraint
system 59
LATCH child-restraint
system 59
LEDs light-emitting
diodes 104
"Left"
– for automatic climate
control 109
– for heated seats 51
Length 209
Level control system 101
License plate lamp,
bulb replacement 197
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
218
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 104
Lighter 119
Lighting of instruments 103
Lights on warning 102
Light switch 102
"Limit" 89
"Limited Release" 25
Limit selection,
adjustment 89
Litter container 117
L mode on automatic
transmission 67
Loading the vehicle 126
"Location" 135, 141, 142
Lock code 174
Locking
– from inside 37
– from outside 35
"LOGIC7" for audio
operation 148
Louvers 105
Low beams 102
– automatic 102
Lower back support, refer
to Lumbar support 46
Lug bolts 199
Luggage compartment lid
– emergency release 40
– manual operation 40
– opening and locking
separately 39
– opening from the
inside 39
– opening from the
outside 38
– operating via remote
control 36
Luggage compartment lid
control, automatic 36, 40
Luggage compartment
net 40
Luggage compartment
volume 210
Luggage rack, refer to
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 127
Lug wrench 198
Lumbar support 46
M
M+S tires 188
Maintenance 193
Malfunction displays 85
"M AM" 150
Manually controlled
recirculated air 107
Manually switch air
conditioner mode on and
off 107
Manual operation
– doors 37
– sliding/tilt sunroof 44
Manual release
– automatic transmission
lockout 70
– fuel filler door 182
– luggage compartment
lid 40
Manual station
search 150
Map CD 130
"Map dir. travel" for
navigation 138
"Map facing N." for
navigation 138
Maximum axle loads 210
Maximum cooling
– automatic climate
control 107
– rear air conditioner 111
Maximum roof weight 210
Maximum speed
– winter tires 188
Maximum speed, refer to
Limit 89
"Memo" 91
"Memorize", automatic
climate control 110
– "Individual" 111
"Memorized Stations",
radio 151
"Memorize" for audio
operation 151
Memory, refer to Seat,
mirror and steering wheel
memory 54
"Memory" for audio
operation 146, 148, 150
"MENU" in DVD mode 167
"Menu name" 23
Menus
– computer 22
– Control Center 22
"MFL" 54
"M FM" 150
"Microfilter" 193
Microphone for hands-free
system 173
Mirrors 52
– automatic dimming 52
– mirror heaters 52
– mirror memory 54
"Missed" 177
Missed calls 176
Mobile phone, refer to
separate Portable phone
manual 170
Modifications, technical 8
Monitor, refer to Control
Center 19
Most frequently called
numbers 176
Music search
– cassette deck 159
N
"Name" for navigation 133
"Navigation" 19, 22, 131
– "NO" 131
– "YES" 131
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
219
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
Navigation computer
– installation location 130
Navigation destination
– manual entry 132
– selecting from the
directory 134
– selecting with map 134
Navigation system 130
– "ACCEPT" command 142
– current location 142
– destination entry 132
– destination guidance in
assistance window 131
– destination list 136
– digital coverage area 130
– directory 134
– "Hotel / Motel" 135
– "Information"
feature 135, 136
– manual entry of
destination address 132
– map CD 130
– map-guided destination
selection 134
– new route 139
– "On location" 135
– recent destinations 136
– route display 138
– route list 139
– route selection 137
– safety 130
– selecting points of
interest 135
– selection options 131
– start active guidance 137
– starting 131
– switching off, refer to
Terminating/interrupting
active guidance 140
– terminating/interrupting
active guidance 140
– town and city centers 143
– "View" function 138, 139
– voice guidance 139
– volume adjustment 140
– what to do if ... 143
– wordmatch principle 142
Navigation system GPS,
refer to Navigation
system 130
Navigation target
cursor 134, 135
Navigation "With
map" 134, 135
"Navi info" 54
"New route" 139
"Next"
– map-guided destination
selection 135
– searching for points of
interest 136
"None Release" 25
Notebook of voice
command system 28
Nozzles 105
NTSC during TV
operation 161
O
OBD interface socket 194
Occupant-restraint
systems 50, 55
Odometer 82
Oil additives 191
Oil change intervals, refer
to Service Interval
Display 83
Oil consumption 190
Oil dipstick 190
Oil specifications 191
"OK" for DVD
operation 167
"ON / OFF" speed limit 89
Onboard computer, refer to
Computer 92
Onboard Diagnostic OBD
– interface socket 194
Onboard tool kit 195
"On country" 136
"1,2,3" 175
"On location" 135
"On town/city" 136
Opening and closing
– from inside 37
– from outside 35
Operating temperatures
– in cassette deck
mode 158
– in CD changer mode 156
– in CD player mode 153
– in DVD mode 163
– in radio mode 149
Oral note 28
Orientation
– changing the display 138
Orientation menu 19
Orientation to north 138
Outside temperature
display 82
P
Paint and finish care, refer
to Care manual
PAL during TV
operation 161
Panic mode 36
Park detent, refer to
Transmission
lockout 68, 70
Park Distance Control
PDC 93
Parked-car ventilation 112
– "Indep. ventil." 112
– "Set time 1" 113
– "Set time 2" 113
– "Switch. time 1" 113
– "Switch. time 2" 113
Parking aid 93
Parking brake 62
– Automatic Hold 63
– manual operation 65
Parking lamp
– bulb replacement 196
Parking lamps 102
Parking with
Automatic Hold 64
Particle filter 111
Passenger-side mirror tilt
function 55
PDC Park Distance
Control 93
"PDC pic." 94
Personal Calling 171
Phone directory, refer to
Telephone directory 175
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
220
Phone number, refer to
Portable phone 174
"Pict. format" 166
"Picture" 146
– DVD changer 166
– TV 161
Please fasten safety belts
warning lamp 50
Pollen 111
Portable phone
– adjusting volume 173
– calling 174
– call termination 175
– controlling with the
buttons on the steering
wheel 18
– emergency calls 173
– hands-free system 173
– missed calls 176
– operating using the
Control Display 171
– redialing 176
– refer to separate Portable
phone manual 170
– selecting phone
numbers 174
– switching on and off 174
– Top 8 list 176
Portable phone battery 171
Portable phone codes 174
Power electric seat 47
Power rating 208
Power socket 119
Pressure, tires 184
Pressure monitor, tires 98
Programmable cruise
control 73
Programming settings,
refer to Vehicle Memory,
Key Memory 60
Publishers 2
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 98
R
Radio
– adjusting the tone 147
– autostore 150
– controls 146
– frequency band
selection 149
– memory locations 150
– operating
temperatures 149
– sample 150
– scan 150
– station search 150
– station selection 151
– store station 150
– switching on 149
– volume 147
– Weather Band 151
Radio mode 61
Radio waveband
selection 149
Rain sensor 72
Reading lamps 104
"Rear" 25
Rear air conditioner 111
– air supply 111
– cooling adjustment 111
– "Extra" 112
– maximum cooling 111
– "Rear air cond." 112
– switching off 111
– switching on/off in the
Control Display 112
Rear armrest, refer to
Center armrest 120
Rear cooler 116
– "Extra" 116
– "Rear refr. box" 116
Rear monitor, refer to
Control Center in rear 24
Rear screen 24
Rear seat heaters 51
Rear seats
– adjusting passenger seat
from the rear 47
– comfort seat
adjustments 47
– head restraint
adjustment 48
Rearview mirror 52
Rear window blind, refer to
Sun blinds 115
Rear window defroster 16
Rear window safety
switch 12, 43
"Recirc. air" 54
Reclining seat 45
Redialing list 176
Redialing with portable
phone 176
Refueling 182
Releasing the hood 189
Remaining distance 88
Remote control 34, 35
Remote control unit 34
Removing condensation
from windows 107
Replacement fuses 201
Replacement keys 35
Replacing tires 186
Reserve warning 87
Reservoir, washer
system 73
Reset 147
"RESET" for
audio operation 148
Residual heat mode 108
"Right"
– for automatic climate
control 109
– for heated seats 51
"RND"
– CD changer 157
– CD player 154
"Roadside Assistance" 178
Roadside assistance calls
– manual activation 173
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 127
"Route" 139
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
221
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
Route
– display 138
– list 139
– map cancellation 138
– map display 138
– selection 137
"Route guid." 137, 140
Route map 138
"Route selec." 137
Route selection 137
"RPA" 98
Run-flat tires 186, 200
S
S 154
Safety belts 50
Safety belt tensioners 50
Safety lock buttons 38
Safety precautions to
observe when using your
phone 170
Safety switch for rear
windows 43
"Save dest." 135
"SCAN"
– CD changer 157
– CD player 154
– radio 150
Scan
– CD changer 157
– CD player 154
– radio 150
Scan sampling
– CD changer 157
– CD player 154
– radio 150
Screen
– rear 24
Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 54
Seat heating 51
Seat memory 54
Seats
– adjusting 45
– sitting safely 45
"Seat temp." 51, 109
Seat ventilation, refer to
Active seat ventilation 51
SECAM during
TV operation 161
Securing cargo, refer to
Cargo loading 126
Securing the load, ski
bag 121
Selecting new route with
navigation system 139
Selecting new scale for
navigation system
display 138
Selecting stored radio
stations 151
Selection options for
navigation 131
Selector lever, automatic
transmission 67
Self-defrosting mirrors 52
Self-leveling
suspension 101
"Service" 83, 193
– "Emissions inspection" 84
– "Spark plugs" 83
– Vehicle inspection 84
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for
US models 193
Service brakes 125
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models 193
Service Interval
Display 83, 193
Service Requirement
Display, refer to Service
Interval Display 83, 193
"SET", refer to Setting
speed limit 89
Set time 113
"Set time 1" 113
"Set time 2" 113
"Settings" 19, 22, 25
Setting the brightness 92
Setting the speed limit 89
Setting time and date 91
Setting timer 113
Shifting, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 69
Shiftlock 67
Short commands for voice
command system 29
Shortest distance 137
"Shortest route" 137
Shoulder support 46
"Side" in sound system
operation 158
Side window blind, refer to
Sun blinds 115
Sitting safely 45
Ski bag 120
Sliding/tilt sunroof 43
– closing in the event of an
electrical defect 44
– convenience mode 37
– convenience operation 36
Snow chains 188, 188
Soft Close Automatic
– doors 38
– luggage compartment
lid 39
SOS call
– using SOS button 173
Sound system
– "MANUAL" selection
mode 151
Sound system adjustments
– "Balance" 148
– balance left/right 147
– "Bass" 148
– equalizer 147
– "Fader" 148
– fader front/rear 147
– "LOGIC7" 148
– LOGIC7 147
– midrange setting 148
– "RESET" 148
– speed-sensitive
volume 147
– "Speed Vol." 148
– "Treble" 148
Spare fuses 201
Spare key 34
– adapter 34
Spare tire 198
"Spark plugs" 83, 193
Specifications for engine
oil 191
Speed limit
– "Limit" 89
Speed limit selection,
revision 89
Speedometer 14
"Speed Vol." in audio
mode 148
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
222
"Sport"
– "EDC" 97
Stability control,
refer to Driving stability
control 94
Standard during TV
operation 161
Standing lamps 103
Start/stop button 61
Starting 62
Starting and stopping
– cassette deck 158
– CD changer 156
– CD player 153
– DVD changer 164
– radio 149
– TV 160
Starting
problems 62, 203, 204
Starting the engine 62
"State inspection" 84
Station, refer to Radio 150
Status lines in Control
Center 24
Steering wheel 18
– adjustment 53
– individual button
assignment options 53
Steering wheel adjustment,
automatic 53
Steering wheel heater 53
Steering wheel memory 54
Steptronic 69
Stopwatch 90
– "INTERM. TIME" 90
Storage, refer to Care
manual
Storage compartments 117
Storing desired speeds,
refer to Programmable
cruise control 75
Storing destination per
voice 141
Storing seating position,
refer to Seat, mirror and
steering wheel
memory 54
Straps, refer to Cargo
loading 126
"Street" for navigation 134
"SUBTITLE" in DVD
mode 167
Summer tires 187
Sun blinds 115
Switch for battery 201
Switching audio sources
on/off 147
Switching off the engine 62
Switching on and off
portable phone 174
"Switch. time1" 113
"Switch. time 2" 113
Symbols 6
– Control Center 20
System failure reports, refer
to Check Control 85
T
Tachometer 82
Tail lamps 197
– bulb replacement 197
"Tape" 146, 158, 159
Target cursor for
navigation 134, 135
Technical data 208
Technical modifications 8
Telephone 170
– operation with the
telephone keypad,
folding 172
Telephone directory 175
– creating voice command
telephone directory 175
– deleting all entries 176
– dialing numbers 175
– dialing numbers
using voice command
system 175
– entering numbers in voice
command directory 175
– entry deletion 176
– updating voice command
telephone directory 175
– viewing entries 176
Telephone keypad,
folding 172
Television, refer to TV 160
"Temp. distribution" 51
Temperature
adjustment 107
Temperature display,
outside temperature 82
Tilt function, passenger-
side mirror 55
Time of arrival,
estimated 88
Timing 90
"Tint" during
TV operation 161
Tire change 197
Tire inflation pressures 184
– checking 184
Tire-pressure
monitoring 98, 99
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 99
Tire Quality Grading 187
Tires
– flat tire 197
– tire changes 197
– tire damage 186
– tire inflation
pressures 184
– tire pressure control 99
– tire replacement 186
– tire size, refer to Wheel
and tire
combinations 187
– tire tread 186
– treadwear indicators 186
"TITLE" 165
Title search
– cassette deck 159
"Tone" for audio
operation 146
Tone for audio operation
– adjusting 147
"Tone" in sound system
operation 148
Tools 195
"TOP 8" 176
"TOP" in DVD mode 167
Torque 208
Tow fittings 203
Towing 203, 204
Tow-starting 204
"TPM" 99
– "INITIALIZE" 99
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 99
– "INITIALIZE" 99
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
223
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobilityReference
Track 209
Traction Control System
– refer to DSC 94
Traffic congestion, refer to
Selecting new route 139
Transmission
– automatic transmission
with L mode 67
– automatic transmission
with Steptronic 69
Transmission lockout 68
– manual release 70
Transporting children
safely 57
Travel route, refer to
Route 138
Tread depth, tires 186
Treble 147
"Treble" in sound system
operation 148
Trip odometer 82
Trunk lid
– refer to luggage
compartment lid 38
Turning circle 209
Turn signal indicators 71
– bulb
replacement 196, 197
"TV" 146, 160, 161
TV 160
– adjusting picture 161
– adjusting the tone 147
– controls 146
– NTSC 161
– PAL 161
– SECAM 161
– selecting programs 160
– selecting standard 161
– storing programs 160
– switching on 160
– volume 147
"TV format" 161
U
Undercoating, refer to Care
manual
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading UTQR 187
Universal garage door
opener, refer to
Integrated universal
remote control 114
Upholstery care, refer to
Care manual
Used batteries 201
V
Vacuum cleaner
connection 119
Valve caps 199
Vehicle battery 200
Vehicle
dimensions 209
Vehicle keys 34
Vehicle Memory 60
Ventilation 108
Ventilation, draft-free 108
Ventilation while
parked 112
Vents, ventilation 105
"Video" 146
"View" for
navigation 138, 139
Viscosity 191
Voice command
system 18, 26
Voice guidance for
navigation 139
Volume
– audio 147
– cassette deck 147
– CD changer 147
– CD player 147
– DVD changer 147
– navigation 140
– portable phone 173
– radio 147
– TV 147
– voice command
system 27
W
Warm feet and a cool
head 108
Warning lamps 15
Warnings in Check
Control 85
Warning triangle 202
Washer nozzles,
windshield 72
"WB" 146
Wear indicators in the
tires 186
Weather Band 151
Weights 210
Wheel and tire
combinations 187
Wheelbase 209
Wheels and tires 184
Width 209
"Window" 110
Windows 42
– convenience mode 37
– convenience operation 36
– safety switch 43
Windshield and headlamp
washer system
– washer fluid 73
Windshield wiper blade
replacement 195
Windshield wiper
system 72
– washer nozzles 72
Winter tires 188
Wiper blade
replacement 195
Wiper system 72
"With highway" 137
"With map" for
navigation 134, 135
Wordmatch principle for
navigation 142
Working in the engine
compartment 189
X
Xenon lamps 196
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
Refueling
To ensure that you always have all the
essential data at hand when refueling, we
recommend that you fill in the following
tables with the specifications and informa-
tion that apply to your vehicle.
Consult the index for individual specifica-
tions.
Fuel
Engine oil
The oil quantity between the two
marks on the dipstick is approx.
1.1 US quarts/1 liter.
Tire inflation pressures
Designation
Please enter your preferred fuel here.
Quality
Summer tires
Front Rear
Winter tires
Front Rear
Up to 4 persons
5 persons or 4 plus luggage
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
01 41 0 157 197 ue
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
7 US-En
Online Edition for Part No. 01 41 0 157 197 - © 11/02 BMW AG
